You are on page 1of 666

s

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Copyright (C) Siemens AG 2006


Issued by Communications Group
Hofmannstrae 51
D-81359 Mnchen
Technical modifications possible.
Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as
they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Abbreviations ......................................................................................1

1.1

Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070


2.1
2.2
2.3

3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8

4.1
4.2

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13

69

Synchronous Equipment Clock Configuration ..................................69


T0 Configuration ...............................................................................72
T1 Configuration ...............................................................................73
T3 Configuration ...............................................................................75
T4 Configuration ...............................................................................77

Alarms
9.1

51

Card Equipment Configuration .........................................................51


SCOH Card Configuration ................................................................52
CLU Card Configuration....................................................................53
SF160G Card Configuration .............................................................54
SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration...............................................55
SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack......................57
IF2M / IF345M Card Configuration ...................................................58
Card Configuration for SDH Cards ...................................................60
IFS40G-MX Card Configuration........................................................61
Card Configuration for ETH Cards....................................................62
IFSO* Cards Configuration ...............................................................64
Port Provisioning Configuration ........................................................65
IF2M - Port Provisioning Config ........................................................66

Timing
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5

43

SDH or Ethernet Interfaces Card Label Information.........................43


PDH Cards Label Information ...........................................................44
IFO155M-E Card Label Information..................................................45
SCOH Card Label Information ..........................................................46
IF2M Card Label Information ............................................................47
IFS40G-MX Card Label Information .................................................48
Booster Cards Label Information ......................................................49

Card Configuration

39

Possible Equipping Information ........................................................39


Actual Equipping Information ............................................................40
Card Inventory Summary ..................................................................41
Protection Shelf Number Config .......................................................42

Card Label Information

37

Extension Shelf Configuration ..........................................................37


ESM-CORE Card Configuration .......................................................38

Subrack Equipping

17

Date / Time Configuration .................................................................17


Network Element Configuration ........................................................18
Module View, Double-row Subrack...................................................20
Module View, Single-row Subrack ....................................................24
Option Settings .................................................................................28
EOW Configurations .........................................................................30
Neighbour Ports ................................................................................31
Script Configuration ..........................................................................32

Extension Shelf

13

Using this Help System.....................................................................13


SURPASS hiT 7070 Features ..........................................................14
About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software ................................................15

General

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

79

Alarm List ..........................................................................................79

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

NEAP Configuration..........................................................................83
Equipment Alarms.............................................................................84
Communication Alarms.....................................................................86
Communication Alarm Feature Table ...............................................88
E3/VC3 Alarms .................................................................................93
1:N MSP Alarms ...............................................................................95
TIF Configuration ..............................................................................97
TCA List ............................................................................................98

9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9

10

Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows


10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
10.10
10.11
10.12

11

13

ii

135

VC4 Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards ......................................135

Traffic Configuration
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
13.10

115

1:N MSP Protected Traffic Flow .....................................................115


1:N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow .................................................116
STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow.................................................117
STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow.................................................118
STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow..........................................................119
STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow..........................................................120
STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ...............................121
STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ...............................122
STM-1 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow...........................................................123
STM-4 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow ......................................................124
STM-16 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow ....................................................125
STM-64 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow ....................................................126
STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ...............................127
STM-16 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow .....................................128
STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow ..................129
STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ...............................130
STM-64 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow .....................................131
STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow ..................132
4F SPRING Traffic Flow .............................................................133

Protection Selection Windows


12.1

101

STM-1 Traffic Flow..........................................................................101


STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection .............................................................102
STM-4 Traffic Flow..........................................................................103
STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection ...........................................................104
STM-16 Traffic Flow........................................................................105
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection ...........................................................106
STM-64 Traffic Flow........................................................................107
ETH Traffic Flow .............................................................................108
E12 or E3 Traffic Flow ....................................................................109
VC4 Configuration ......................................................................110
VC4 Selection .............................................................................113
VC4 Static Multiplex Traffic Flow................................................114

Protection Traffic Flow


11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
11.10
11.11
11.12
11.13
11.14
11.15
11.16
11.17
11.18
11.19

12

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

137

Port Configuration ...........................................................................137


Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards...............................................139
STM-N Configuration ......................................................................142
AU4/VC4 Configuration...................................................................146
VC3/VC12 Configuration CTP ........................................................148
VC3/VC12 Configuration TTP.........................................................150
ETH Configuration ..........................................................................153
E12 Configuration ...........................................................................156
E3 Configuration .............................................................................158
IFSOA Config ..........................................................................159

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

14

Multiplex Structure
14.1

15

16
17
18
19

20

21

22

217

Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow............................................217


Extension Link Protection Configuration.........................................218
Add Extension Link Protection ........................................................219
ISTM 4 Configuration ......................................................................221
ESM ISTM 4 Configuration .............................................................222

Concatenations
22.1
22.2
22.3
22.4

193

2F SPRING Configuration...............................................................193
2F-SPRING Extra Configuration .....................................................196
4F SPRING Configuration...............................................................199
2F / 4F SPRING Topology Configuration .......................................202
2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration .........................................204
STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING ......................205
STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING ......................................206
STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra ............................207
STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING ......................................208
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING..................209
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING..................................210
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra ........................211
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING..................................212
<2F or 4F> Spring or Spring X Nut Config .................................213
4F-Spring X Config .....................................................................214

Link Protection
21.1
21.2
21.3
21.4
21.5

185

1:N MSP Configuration ...................................................................185


Add 1:N MSP ..................................................................................188
1:N MSP Extension.........................................................................189
Add Working Ports ..........................................................................190
Working STM-1 Selection ...............................................................191
Working VC4 Selection ...................................................................192

2F/4F-SPRING Protection
20.1
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
20.8
20.9
20.10
20.11
20.12
20.13
20.14
20.15

183

1:1 MSP Configuration....................................................................183

1 to N MSP Protection
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6

181

STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration ......................................................181

1 to 1 MSP Protection
18.1

179

Protection Management..................................................................179

1 plus 1 MSP Protection


17.1

163

Cross Connections List ...................................................................163


Plain Cross Connections List..........................................................166
Add Cross Connection ....................................................................168
Cross Connection Details ...............................................................170
Cross Connections Graphic ............................................................171
Cross Connection Graphic Details..................................................173
Modify Cross Connection................................................................174
Overhead Cross Connections.........................................................175

Protection Management
16.1

161

VC4 Multiplex Structure ..................................................................161

Cross Connections
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.7
15.8

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

223

VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection .....................................................223


Virtual 2x VC3 Selection .................................................................224
Virtual 4x VC4 Selection .................................................................225
Virtual 7x VC4 Selection .................................................................226

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

iii

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

22.5
22.6
22.7
22.8
22.9
22.10
22.11
22.12
22.13
22.14
22.15

23

24

26

27

28

29

iv

303

MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information ......................................303


MCF CLNS Performance ................................................................305

MCF DCC
29.1

297

Message Communication Functions...............................................297


MCF Stack Parameters Configuration ............................................298
MCF Transport Connection Information .........................................300
MCF Transport Connection Performance.......................................302

MCF CLNS
28.1
28.2

283

LCAS State Configuration...............................................................283


Modify LCAS Concatenation Group................................................285
LCAS VC3-nv Configuration ...........................................................286
LCAS VC12-nv Configuration .........................................................287
LCAS VC3-nv Virtual VC3 Selection ..............................................288
LCAS VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection ..........................................289
LCAS Virtual VC3 Configuration.....................................................290
LCAS Virtual VC12 Configuration ...................................................293

MCF General
27.1
27.2
27.3
27.4

267

GFP Group Traffic Flow ..................................................................267


GFP Group Subview .......................................................................269
GFP Assignment.............................................................................270
PF2G5 GFP Assignment ................................................................272
PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration ............................274
PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration ............................276
PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration ............................277
PF2G5 Add CUG ............................................................................278
SDH GFP Assignment ....................................................................280

LCAS
26.1
26.2
26.3
26.4
26.5
26.6
26.7
26.8

257

Virtual 2x AU4/VC4 Selection .........................................................257


Virtual VC12 Configuration .............................................................258
Virtual VC3 Configuration ...............................................................261
Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration .......................................................264

GFP Configurations
25.1
25.2
25.3
25.4
25.5
25.6
25.7
25.8
25.9

243

VLAN Functionality .........................................................................243


VLAN C Traffic Flow .......................................................................246
VLAN Selection...............................................................................248
VLAN C Mode GFP Assignment.....................................................249
Mixed Mode GFP Assignment ........................................................252
Assigned VLAN IDs Information .....................................................255
Add VLAN ID Assignment...............................................................256

Virtual VCs
24.1
24.2
24.3
24.4

25

Virtual 16x VC4 Selection ...............................................................227


Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection .......................................................228
Concatenated VC4 Configuration ...................................................229
VC12-2v Configuration....................................................................232
VC3-2v Configuration......................................................................233
Concatenation Configuration ......................................................234
Concatenation Details ................................................................237
Add Concatenation Group ..........................................................238
Concatenation Group Templates................................................239
Modify Template .........................................................................240
VCLO-Concatenation Configuration ...........................................241

VLAN
23.1
23.2
23.3
23.4
23.5
23.6
23.7

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

309

MCF DCC Configuration .................................................................309


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
29.2
29.3
29.4
29.5
29.6

30

31

33

34

35

371

TCP Connections Information.........................................................371


TCP Connections Entry Details ......................................................373

Data
35.1
35.2
35.3
35.4
35.5
35.6
35.7
35.8
35.9

343

OSPF Configuration........................................................................343
OSPF Areas Configuration .............................................................345
OSPF Areas Entry Modify...............................................................347
OSPF Area Metric Configuration ....................................................348
OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration............................................349
OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add .................................................351
OSPF Interfaces Configuration .......................................................352
OSPF Interfaces Entry Add.............................................................354
OSPF Interface Metric Configuration..............................................356
OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration .......................................357
OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add .............................................359
OSPF Neighbours Information ...................................................360
OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information ........................................362
OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details......................................364
OSPF LSDB Information ............................................................365
OSPF LSDB Entry Details ..........................................................367
OSPF External LSDB Information ..............................................368
OSPF External LSDB Entry Details............................................370

TCP Settings
34.1
34.2

335

IP Addresses Configuration ............................................................335


IP Addresses Entry Modify..............................................................338
IP Static Routing Configuration.......................................................339
IP Static Routing Entry Add ............................................................341
IP Static Routing Entry Modify ........................................................342

OSPF Settings
33.1
33.2
33.3
33.4
33.5
33.6
33.7
33.8
33.9
33.10
33.11
33.12
33.13
33.14
33.15
33.16
33.17
33.18

327

MCF IP over OSI Configuration ......................................................327


MCF OSI over IP Configuration ......................................................328
MCF OSI over IP Performance .......................................................330
MCF OSI over IP, Adding a Reachable Address............................332
MCF OSI over IP, Modifying a Reachable Address .......................334

IP Settings
32.1
32.2
32.3
32.4
32.5

319

MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration .............................................319


MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance ..............................................321
Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address...........................................323
Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address ......................................325

MCF OSI/IP
31.1
31.2
31.3
31.4
31.5

32

MCF DCC Linkage Configuration ...................................................311


MCF DCC Linkage Performance ....................................................313
Adding a Reachable DCC Address ................................................315
Modifying a Reachable DCC Address ............................................317
Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections ..................318

MCF Ethernet
30.1
30.2
30.3
30.4

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

375

Subrack Data ..................................................................................375


ASIC Data Information ....................................................................376
Copy Data .......................................................................................377
Copy Card Data ..............................................................................379
DB Management Configuration ......................................................380
DB Download Dialog.......................................................................382
DB Upload Dialog ...........................................................................383
NE Logs Information .......................................................................384
Log Records Attribute .....................................................................385

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Copy to Permanent MACs..........................................................386

35.10

36

Performance
36.1
36.2
36.3
36.4
36.5
36.6
36.7
36.8
36.9
36.10
36.11
36.12
36.13

37

38

vi

433

IF7FE2GEL2 - System Config ........................................................433


IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry add........................................................453
IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry Modify ...................................................455
IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Add .........................................457
IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Modify .....................................458
IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Config .............................................460
IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Add ........................................463
IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Modify....................................464
IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Config ...........................................465
IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Add .................................468
IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Modify .............................469
IF7FE2GEL2 - Port config ..........................................................470
IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Management Config ...................................472
IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Statistics Information ..................................486
IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Configuration..............................................489
IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Add ...................................................491
IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Modify ...............................................492
IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Statistics Information..................................493
IF7FE2GEL2 - Group Config ......................................................495
IF7FE2GEL2 - Groups Queue Entry Config...............................497
IF7FE2GEL2 - Trap info .............................................................498
IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Config ..............................................502
IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Details ....................................504
IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Modify ....................................507
IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Statistics Info ...................................510
IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Debug ....................................512
IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Config.......................................................515
IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Permanent Entry Add ..............................516
IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Modify.............................................518
IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Details ............................................520
IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Statistics Info ...........................................521
IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Info .......................................522
IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details ..................................524
IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Config ........................................526
IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Entry Add...................................528
IF7FE2GEL2 - History Ethernet Statistics Info ...........................529
IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details ..................................532

RPR
38.1
38.2
38.3

387

Ethernet Packet Performance.........................................................387


AU4 PJE Performance....................................................................390
STM-64 Gauge Performance..........................................................392
MSTTP Near End Performance ......................................................395
MSTTP Far End Performance ........................................................399
RSTTP Near End Performance ......................................................403
VCCTP Near End Performance ......................................................407
VCCTP Far End Performance ........................................................411
VCTTP Near End Performance ......................................................415
VCTTP Far End Performance ....................................................419
VC12 Near End Performance.....................................................423
VC12 Far End Performance .......................................................427
GFP Frames Performance .........................................................431

IF7FE2GEL2 card
37.1
37.2
37.3
37.4
37.5
37.6
37.7
37.8
37.9
37.10
37.11
37.12
37.13
37.14
37.15
37.16
37.17
37.18
37.19
37.20
37.21
37.22
37.23
37.24
37.25
37.26
37.27
37.28
37.29
37.30
37.31
37.32
37.33
37.34
37.35
37.36
37.37

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

535

RPR Switch Configuration ..............................................................535


RPR Ring Performance ..................................................................538
RPR Feeder Performance ..............................................................541
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
38.4

39

40

42

43

44

45

587

How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling ................................587


How to Suppress Alarms ................................................................588
How to Configure TIF Ports ............................................................589

How to... (Cross Connections)


45.1
45.2
45.3
45.4
45.5
45.6
45.7
RPR
45.8
45.9
45.10
45.11
45.12
45.13
45.14
45.15

583

How to Configure the Timing ..........................................................583


How to Set Sync Priorities ..............................................................585

How to... (Alarms)


44.1
44.2
44.3

575

How to Configure NSAP Settings ...................................................575


How to Configure the Subrack Equipping.......................................576
How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards ......................................577
How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports ..........................................578
How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to
579
How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object ...............580
How to Configure ETH Cards and Debugging................................581

How to... (Timing)


43.1
43.2

555

NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance.................................555


Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance ..........................................557
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance .......................................561
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance ...............................................566
SCOH and CLU Card Fault Clearance ...........................................569
TIF Fault Clearance ........................................................................572
Fan Unit Fault Clearance ................................................................573

How to... (General Tasks)


42.1
42.2
42.3
42.4
42.5
Object
42.6
42.7

549

Software Management....................................................................549
Software Download.........................................................................551
Delta Software Download ...............................................................552
Active APS Record .........................................................................553
APS Compatibility Information ........................................................554

Fault Clearance
41.1
41.2
41.3
41.4
41.5
41.6
41.7

545

Access Information .........................................................................545


NMS NE Password .........................................................................546
Change Password to Default ..........................................................547

Software
40.1
40.2
40.3
40.4
40.5

41

Adding a Permanent Entry..............................................................544

Security
39.1
39.2
39.3

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

591

How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Filter Options ....................591


How to Create a Cross Connection ................................................592
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection...................593
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection.....................594
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection.....................595
How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12/VC3 Cross Connection ...........596
How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an
597
How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection.............................598
How to Add and Remove Path Protections ....................................599
How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection ............................600
How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection...........................601
How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection ...........602
How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection ..................603
How to Disconnect a Cross Connection.....................................604
How to Configure DCC Cross Connections ...............................605

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

vii

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

46

How to... (OH Cross Connections)


46.1
46.2
46.3

47

viii

627

How to Configure SDH Concatenations .........................................627


How to Configure ETH Concatenations..........................................628

629

How to Create / Delete VC Channels .............................................629


How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups....................................630
How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel .........................631
How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG..........................................632
How to Specify the CUG Service Class..........................................634
How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic ........635
How to Configure RPR Bandwidths ................................................636

637

How to Download VCDB Files ........................................................637


How to Upload VCDB Files.............................................................638

How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules)


51.1
51.2
51.3
51.4
51.5
51.6

52

How to Create / Delete a 1+1 MSP Line Protection .......................611


How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection ..........................612
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection ..........................613
How to Configure the Squelch Table for 2F or 4F Rings................614
How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection ...........................615
How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card Protection .......................617
How to Create / Delete an SF2G5, SF10G or SF160G Card Protection 618
How to Configure RPR Protection ..................................................619
How to Create an SNCP Protection................................................620
How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Existing LO Path...........621
How to Set Up the Squelching Table .........................................623
How to Set Up a Microshelf Extension Link ...............................625

How to... (Data and Software Handling)


50.1
50.2

51

611

How to... (GFP Configurations)


49.1
49.2
49.3
49.4
49.5
49.6
49.7

50

How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection Filter Options..............607


How to Create an OH Cross Connection........................................608
How to Disconnect an OH Cross Connection.................................609

How to... (Concatenations)


48.1
48.2

49

607

How to... (Protections)


47.1
47.2
47.3
47.4
47.5
47.6
47.7
47.8
47.9
47.10
47.11
47.12

48

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

639

How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH ...................................639


How to Change a Defective SCOH.................................................640
How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC .....643
How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH.................646
Retrieve NSAP and VCDB..............................................................649
Flow Chart Symbol Legend.............................................................650

Index

651

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

1.1 Abbreviations

ADM

Add/Drop Multiplexer

AFI

Authority and Format Identifier

AIS

Alarm Indication Signal

AK TPDU

Acknowledge Transport Protocol Data Unit

ALS

Automatic Laser Shutdown

APD

Avalanche Photo Diode

APS

Automatic Protection Switching / Application Program Switching

AS

Alarm Suppression

ASBR

Autonomous System Border Router

ASCII

American Standard for Information Interchange

ASN.1

Abstract Syntax Notification One (ITU X.208)

ASW

Application SoftWare

AU

Administrative Unit

AU4

Administrative Unit for VC-4

AUI

Attachment Unit Interface

AUX

Auxiliary channel

BASW

BAsic SoftWare

BBE

Background Block Error

BDM

Background Debug Mode interface

BER

Bit Error Ratio

CC

Cross Connect / Cross Connection

CD

Collision Detection

CE

Communaut Europenne

CF

Card Failure

CFG

Configuration

CH

Channel

CL

Configuration Log

CLNS

ConnectionLess Network layer Service

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

CLR

Clear

CLU

Central Clock Unit

CP

Connection Protection

CPL

Current Problem List

CPU

Central Processing Unit

CRC

Cyclic Redundancy Check

CRS

Card Release State

CS4

Connection Switch 4xSTM-1

CSO

Card Switch Off

CT

Card Type

CTP

Connection Termination Point

CUG

Closed User Group

DB

Data Base

DC

Direct Current

DCC

Data Communication Channel

DCCB

Data Communication Channel Bus

DCCM

DCC bytes D4 to D12 (Multiplex section)

DCCR

DCC bytes D1 to D3 (Regenerator section)

DCM

Dispersion Compensation Module

DCN

Data Communication Network

DEC

Decimal

DEMUX

Demultiplexer

DL

Data Link

DNU

Do Not Use

DRAM

Dynamic Random Access Memory

DSP

Domain Specific Part

E4

Electrical interface signal

EBC

Error Block Count

ECC

Embedded Communication Channel

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

ECCM

ECC for Multiplex section

ECCR

ECC for Regeneration section

EDI

Equipment Defect Indication / Electronic Data Interchange

EEPROM

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EM

Element Manager

EOW

Engineering Order Wire

EPROM

Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EPS

Equipment Protection Switch

ES

Electrical Section / Errored Second(s)

ESD

ElectroStatic Discharge

ESM-Core

Provides optical 622 Mbit/s link to main shelf

ETS

European Telecommunication Standard

ETH

Ethernet

ETSI

European Telecommunication Standard Institute

EXC

Excessive bit error rate

Standardized interface for connection of the operating terminal

FAA

Fan Alarm Adapter

FAS

Frame Alignment Signal

FC/PC

Connector type

FE

Far End

FEBE

Far End Block Error

FEC

Forward Error Correction

FEPROM

Flash Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

FERF

Far End Receive Failure

FG

Functional Group

FIFO

First In First Out

FM

Fault Management

FO

Fiber Optic

FOD

Fiber Optic Distributor

FOP

Failure of (MSP) Protocol

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

FOT

Fail of Topology

FTA

File Transfer Area

FTP

File Transfer Protocol

FU

Functional Unit

FW

Firmware

GDMO

Guidelines for the Definition of Managed Objects (ITU X.722)

GFP

Generic Framing Procedure

GMT

Greenwich Mean Time

GTP

Group Termination Point

GUI

Graphical User Interface

HW

HardWare

HEL

Historical Event Log

HEX

Hexadecimal

HO

Higher Order

ICB

Internal Control Bus

ICS

Internal Communication System

ICU

Internal Control Unit

ID

Identification

IDI

Initial Domain Identifier

IDP

Initial Domain Part

IEC

International Electrotechnical Commission

IF

Interface

IF2M

Electrical E1 interface card, 63 x 2 Mbit/s

IF345M

PDH Interface 34/45 Mbit/s

IFO155M

Optical STM-1 card, Octuple 155 Mbit/s

IFO155M-E

Electrical STM-1 card, Octuple 155 Mbit/s

IFOFE

Optical Octuple Fast Ethernet card

IFOFE-E

Electrical Octuple Fast Ethernet card, VC-4 or VC-3

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

IFOFES-E

Electrical Octuple Fast Ethernet card, VC-3 or VC12

IFQ2G5, IFQ2G5B

Optical STM-16 card, Quad 2.5 Gbit/s, SFP

IFQ622M

Optical STM-4 card, Quad 622 Mbit/s, SFP

IFQGBE

Optical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card

IFQGBE-E

Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card

IFQGBEB

Optical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card; provides VLAN concentrator


functionality

IFQGBEB-E

Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card; provides VLAN concentrator


functionality

IFQGBE-E

Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet Card

IFS10G, IFS10GB

Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s

IFS10G-M

Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for Metro WDM

IFS10G-R

Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for Regio WDM

IFS10G-WLS

Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for WLS WDM purposes

IFS2G5

Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s

IFS2G5B

Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s, SFP

IFS40G-MX

Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Card, 4 x 10 Gbit/s to 40 Gbit/s

IFSOA

Interface Single Optical Amplifier

IFSOA-PDC

Interface Single Optical Amplifier-PDC

IFSOB

Interface Single Optical Booster

IFSOB-PDC

Interface Single Optical Booster-PDC

IMN

Installation Manual

IMTS

Internal Multiplex Timing Source

INT

Internal Supervision

I/O

Input/Output

IP

Internet Protocol

IS

Intermediate System

ISDH

Internal SDH Signal

ISF

ISDH Signal Fail

ISO

International Standards Organization

ISTM

Internal Synchronous Transport Module

ISU

ISDH Switch Layer Unit

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

ITMN

Installation and Test Manual

ITU

International Telecommunication Union

K1, K2

Automatic Protection Switching

KBUS

K-byte BUS for MSP Control

LAN

Local Area Network

LAPD

Link Access Procedure on D Channel

LCAS

Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCT

Local Craft Terminal

LED

Light Emitting Diode

LNQ622M

PDH Extension Link Card

LO

Lower Order

LO SF

Lower Order Switching Fabric

LOF

Loss of Frame

LOL

Loss of Lock

LOM

Loss of Marker

LOP

Loss of Pointer

LOS

Loss of Signal

LSDB

Link State Data Base

LSU

Line Switching Unit

LT

Line Termination

LT0

Loss of T0 clock

LTI

Loss of Timing Source Incoming (T1, T3)

LTS

Loss of Timing Source

MAC

Media Access Control

MACAT

Media Access Control Address Table

MCF

Message Communication Functions

MDI

Multiple Document Interface

MIB

Management Information Base

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

MIBS

Management Information Base of Synchronous Multiplexer

MIS-PT

Mismatch Path Trace

MIS-RT

Mismatch Regenerator Trace

MMC

Multimedia Card

MMI

Man Machine Interface

MS

Multiplex Section

MSAIS

Multiplex Section Alarm Indication

MSFERF

Multiplex Section Far End Receive Failure

MSOH

Multiplex Section Overhead

MSP

Multiplex Section Protection

MSPCO

Multiplexer Section Path Connection

MSPTF

Multiplexer Section Protection Function

MTBF

Mean Time Between Failures

MTS

Multiplexer Timing Source

MTTR

Mean Time to Repair

NC/P

Network Connection Protection

NCT

Network Craft Terminal

NE

Network Element

NEC

Network Element Controller

NEAP

Network Element Alarm Panel

NMS

Network Management System

NPDU

Network Protocol Data Unit

NRZ

Non Return to Zero

NRZI

Non Return to Zero Invert

NSAP

Network Service Access Point

OAS

Optical Amplifier Section

OGL

Operator Guidelines

OH

Overhead

OHCC

Overhead Cross Connections

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

OHF

Overhead Functions

OH-IF

Overhead Interface

OGL

Operator Guidelines

OOF

Out of Frame

OS

Optical Section

OSNR

Optical Signal/Noise Ratio

OSPF

Open Shortest Path First (IP Protocol)

P4

Plesiochronous Digital Signal

Protection

PCS

Plesiochronous Connection Supervision

PCU

Peripheral Control Unit

PDH

Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PDU

Protocol Data Unit

PET

Possible Equipping Table

PF2G5

Packet Switch Fabric Card

PJE

Pointer Justification Event

PLL

Phase Locked Loop

PLM

Payload Mismatch

PLP

Packet Level Protection

PM

Performance Management or Performance Monitoring

POH

Path Overhead

POM

Path Overhead Monitoring

PP

Path Protection

PRBS

Pseudo Random Bit Sequence

PRC

Primary Reference Clock

PROM

Programmable Read-Only Memory

PSE

Path Switching Event

PSU

Power Supply Unit

PTI

Path Trace Identifier

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Interface to a Telecommunication Management Network

Q-B3

Q-Interface to Operations System via Ethernet-LAN

QECC

Q-Interface via DCC

Q-F

Standardized Interface for Connection of the Operating Terminal

QOS

Quality of Service

QST-B3

QD2-Interface to LCT

Qx

Interface to a Telecommunication Management Network

RAM

Random Access Memory

RAP

Reachable Address Prefix

RD

Read

RDI

Remote Defect Indication

REI

Remote Error Indication

RFI

Remote Failure Indication

RISC

Reduced Instruction Set Computer

RL

Remote Loop

RLC

Remote Loop Control

ROM

Read-Only Memory

RPR

Resilient Packet Ring

RS

Regenerator Section

RSOH

Regenerator Section Overhead

RTC

Real Time Clock

RTI

Regenerator Trace Identifier

Rx

Receiver

SC

Connector Type

SCOH

Central Controller Card

SD

Signal Degraded

SDH

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SDI

Service and Diagnostic Interface

SEC

Synchronous Equipment Clock

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

SEMF

Synchronous Equipment Management Function

SES

Severely Errored Second(s)

SET2

Synchronous Equipment Timing

SETG

Synchronous Equipment Timing Generator

SETS

Functional Group "Synchronous Equipment Timing Source"

SF

Signal Fail

SF160G

Central VC-4 Switch Card

SF2G5

Low Order VC-3 / VC-12 Switch Card

SF10G

Low Order VC-3 / VC-12 Switch Card

SFP

Small Form factor Pluggable (pluggable optical module)

SNCP/I

Sub-Network Connection Protection / Inherent Monitoring

SNCP/N

Sub-Network Connection Protection / Non-intrusive Monitoring

SNPA

Sub-Network Point of Attachment

SOH

Section Overhead

SPO

Spontaneous Alarm

SQM

Sequence Mismatch

SSF

Server Signal Fail

SSM

Synchronization Status Message

SSU

Synchronzation Supply Unit

STM-N

Synchronous Transport Module Level N

SUG

Supervisory Unequipped Generation

SUM

Supervisory Unequipped Monitoring

SW

Software

T0

System Clock

T1

Timing Reference Signal from Line Signal

T3

Input for External Clock Reference Signal

T4

Output for Clock Reference Signal

TCA

Threshold Crossing Alarm

TCP

Termination Connection Point

TxDeg

Transmit Degraded

10

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

TED

Technical Description

TxFail

Transmission Fail

TIF

Telemetry Interface

TIM

Trace Identifier Mismatch

TMP

Timestamp

TNMS

Telecommunication Network Management System

TTI

Trail Trace Identifier

TTP

Trail Termination Point

TP

Termination Point

TPDU

Transport Protocol Data Unit

TSD

Trail Signal Degrade

TSF

Trail Signal Fail

TU

Tributary Unit

TUG

Tributary Unit Group

Tx

Transmitter

TXDeg

Transmit Degrade Signal

TXFAIL

Transmit Failure

UAS

Unavailable Second(s)

UAT

Unavailable Time

UMN

User Manual

UNEQ

Unequipped

USI

User Interface

UTIF

Universal Transmission Internal Interface

VC

Virtual Container

VC-n

Virtual Container Level n

VCDB

Variable Configuration Data Block

VCnTTP

VCn Trail Termination Point

VLAN

Virtual Local Area Network

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

11

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

WDM

Wavelength Division Multiplexing

WLS

WDM Longspan System

WR

Write

WTR

Wait to Restore time

12

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

2 Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070


2.1 Using this Help System
This help system provides information on the windows and menus of the SURPASS hiT 7070,
repair actions after alarm messages, and selected task instructions ("How to ...").

Displaying help topics


In the Help menu, click Help Topics...
The SURPASS hiT 7070 Help window is displayed, giving you access to the table of contents,
an index, and a full-text search function.

Displaying the help of the currently open window


Press the F1 key
or
Click the question mark button in the toolbar

or
in the Help menu, click On Window... F1.

Displaying information on the software


In the Help menu, click About...

Printing help windows


To start the printout click the print button in the toolbar.

In case of technical problems with the printout, print the identical help page out of the GUIMN
manual.

Notes
Standard MS Windows functions and buttons are not described in this online help.
If there is a path stated at the top of the help window specifying how to find the corresponding
SURPASS hiT 7070 window, that path should only be seen as an example. In many cases,
there are also other ways to open the same SURPASS hiT 7070 window.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

13

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

2.2 SURPASS hiT 7070 Features


The SURPASS hiT 7070 is a comprehensive multi-service SDH multiplexer and crossconnect for universal use. The SURPASS hiT 7070 is configurable as

TMX (terminal multiplexer),

ADM (add/drop multiplexer), or

small LXC (local cross-connect).

in multi-service access and edge network applications.

The network elements can be used in a straightforward way of creating point-to-point


connections, linear chain configurations and ring configurations.

According to requirements, equipping for the following application scenarios is possible:

Terminal-to-terminal topologies,

Linear topologies with add/drop functions (chains),

Feeder network functionalities.

The SURPASS hiT 7070 offers not only standard functions, but also a lot of additional
sophisticated functions for fast and complex traffic transfer and enhanced protection features,
such as:

14

Ethernet access with 10BaseT, 100BaseTX, and 1000T interfaces,

Interfaces for SDH traffic signals up to STM-64,

Virtual concatenation,

Contiguous concatenation,

Single fiber operation with optical splitter,

2-fiber ring protection,

4-fiber ring protection,

RPR functionalities,

Closed User Groups (CUG),

EOW functions,

Support of VLAN,

Support of logical ports,

IP / OSI tunneling,

etc.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

2.3 About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software


The complete Element Manager software (to be installed on the operating terminal) consists
of the following components:

Ethernet software as a software package of the used Ethernet hardware.


(HW component with SW driver for the Ethernet card of the PC, Workstation, or
Mainframe used. This driver is not part of the SURPASS hiT 7070 software package.)

The OSI Stack software consisting of LLC Driver and OSI Stack (Marben Stack)
software,

NE Proxy software,

TNMS CT software,

Java Virtual Machine software,

SURPASS hiT 7070 software package (LCT or NCT).

[6243]

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

15

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

3 General
3.1 Date / Time Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Configuration -> NE Time...

Opening this window causes a request apply of date and time of the NE. The received values
are displayed in the Current NE Time field and are automatically updated each second,
according to the internal clock source of the PC that is used as LCT/NCT.

Current NE Time
The current NE time can be changed by adjusting the PC-time in the system time setup of the
MS Windows control panel.
Adjust NE Time to PC-GMT
The date and time values for the PC-GMT are given by the MS Windows system time
settings. The date and time values are displayed in read only fields.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

17

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

3.2 Network Element Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Configuration -> Network Element...

The window is used to allocate user defined location name and application type.

Value Ranges:

Name

48 Bytes

Location

64 Bytes

Type
Displays the NE type.
Startup Info
Displays information about the latest NE startup.
18

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

NE Unique HW Code
Comprising the NE serial number and family code.
Application Type
An application type name can be inserted.
Second Power Supply Monitoring
If this checkbox is set, the Second Power Supply Monitoring is activated.
PSE Switch For Whole NE
If this checkbox is set, the path protection switching event notification is sent in case of an
activated SNCP. Its configuration is valid for all protected cross connections of the NE.

Persistency Time
In this field, you can make the time settings for alarm self-recognition.
Raise Time [0..30 s]
This is the minimum time for which an alarm must be in the raised state in order to be
reported securely. The default raise time is 2 s.
Clear Time [1..30 s]
Specifies how long the alarm must be in the cleared state before it is reported as cleared. The
default clear time is 10 s.

Log Overwrite
Specifies if the Exception Log and/or the Trace Log will be overwritten in case of overflow.

Fault
Enable/Disable the following abnormal conditions (as communication alarms with severity
"Warning"):
enabled laser shutdown,
enabled port loopbacks,
deactivated ALS on optical interface cards,
active operator commands for timing configurations (T0 configuration, T4 configuration),
active operator commands within protection schemes (1+1 MSP, 1:1 MSP, 1:N MSP,
2FSPRING, 4FSPRING, Microshelf extension traffic protection, 1:N card protection of
IF2M/IF345M/IFO155M-E, RPR bypass protection)

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

19

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

3.3 Module View, Double-row Subrack

This window is accessible via its toolbar button

This window represents the physical appearance of the managed NE. Between the NE and
Subrack fields the configurated Extension Shelf types (subrack type and subrack ID) are
visible. It shows the slots and their (required) equipping. The Module View displays the
current required equipping of the NE only. The current equipping is not regarded in this view.

The Module View window consists of the top window segment and the bottom window
segment
Each part of the window contains a vertical scrollbar, if not all contents are visible.

20

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Top window segment


The top window segment contains different symbols for displaying the physical slots and the
possibly equipped cards.
The NE symbol in the uppermost row is used to display and configure NE-wide settings. The
symbol contains an alarm mask indicator (A).

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the NE-wide settings.
If one or more microshelves are used, there are several subrack tabs to display and configure
subrack-related settings:
Subrack 1 is the double-core subrack,
Subrack 2 and the following are the microshelves.
Adding or removing microshelf tabs from the Module View is possible via the Extension Shelf
Config window.

The slot number symbols are used to configure the NE equipment.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

21

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Right-click the slot number and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.
The card symbol below each slot number symbol displays the current required equipping of
the NE. The appearance of the card symbols depends on the equipment state.

22

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.

Bottom window segment


The bottom window segment provides the port list.
It shows the physical ports of a card, if the card symbol in the top window segment is selected
(clicked).

Right-click the symbols, and in the context menu, click Subview... to open the Traffic Flow
windows of these ports.

How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards


How to Configure the Equipping
How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH
How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 or SF160G Card Protection
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection
How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

23

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

3.4 Module View, Single-row Subrack

This window is accessible via the toolbar button

This window represents the physical appearance of the managed NE. Between the NE and
Subrack fields the configurated Extension Shelf types (subrack type and subrack ID) are
visible. It shows the slots and their (required) equipping. The Module View displays the
current required equipping of the NE only. The current equipping is not regarded in this view.

24

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The Module View window consists of the top window segment and the bottom window
segment
Each part of the window contains a vertical scrollbar, if not all contents are visible.

Top window segment


The top window segment contains different symbols for displaying the physical slots and the
possibly equipped cards.
The NE symbol in the uppermost row is used to display and configure NE-wide settings. The
symbol contains an alarm mask indicator (A).

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the NE-wide settings.
If one or more microshelves are used, there are several subrack tabs to display and configure
subrack-related settings:
Subrack 1 is the single-core subrack,
Subrack 2 and the following are the microshelves.
Adding or removing microshelf tabs from the Module View is possible via the Extension Shelf
Config window.

The slot number symbols are used to configure the NE equipment.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

25

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Right-click the slot number and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.
The card symbol below each slot number symbol displays the current required equipping of
the NE. The appearance of the card symbols depends on the equipment state.

26

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.

Bottom window segment


The bottom window segment provides the port list.
It shows the physical ports of a card, if the card symbol in the top window segment is selected
(clicked).

Right-click the symbols, and in the context menu, click Subview... to open the Traffic Flow
windows of these ports.

How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards


How to Configure the Equipping
How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH
How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection
How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 or SF160G Card Protection
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection
How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

27

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

3.5 Option Settings

This window is accessible via its toolbar button

In this window, you can preset the alarm severity threshold, the window that is opened at
startup, the time zone frequency display, and several general options for your desktop.

Alarm Severity Threshold


Used to set the threshold for alarm display. Alarms with severities above and equal to the
threshold are included in the alarm summary displayed in the cards. Alarms with severities
below the configured threshold are excluded from the alarm summary displayed in the cards.
For example, if critical is selected, only critical alarms are indicated in the cards. If major is
selected, critical and major alarms are displayed.
By default, the threshold warning is set which means that all alarms are included in the alarm
summary.
28

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Save on Exit: Used to enable or disable the saving of the alarm severity threshold setting at
application termination.
Open at Startup
Used to set the windows that open automatically at the next system startup.
Time Display
Used to set the time zone. Displayed or saved times are dependent on settings according to
the system time zone of the operation system.
Frequency Display
Used to set the kind of display (frequency or wavelength or channel numbers) with optical
interfaces.
General
Alarm Flash: Used to enable or disable flashing.
Maximum numbers of list entries can be selected.
Disable Apply Button during Outstanding Data can be selected.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

29

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

3.6 EOW Configurations

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Configuration -> Overhead Functions...

Two Wire Handset:


Allows to select the telephone number of the NE.
Four Wire EM Interface:
Allows to connect to a EOW conference.

30

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

3.7 Neighbour Ports

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Configuration -> Neighbour Ports...

Filter
Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

31

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

3.8 Script Configuration

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> File -> Script Configuration...

This window allows to handle script configuration files, which can be used to configure the
NE.
The script language gives access to all NE configurations except for MCF, overhead cross
connections and SW management.

32

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Top Section
The displayed symbols correspond to the File and Script menus:

Symbol

Corresponding Menu
Item

Description

File -> New File

Creates a new empty script


configuration file.

File -> Open...

Opens an existing script configuration


file.

File -> Save As...

Saves the script configuration file.

Script -> Execute

Starts script configuration.

Script -> Stop

Stops script configuration.

Script -> Record

Automatically creates a script


configuration file.

For automatic creating, click the Record symbol, perform NE configurations, then click the
Stop symbol.
For manual creating, enter command lines according to the syntax described below.

Bottom Section
When the script configuration file is started, the bottom section shows parser errors.
To get the line of the error in the script configuration file, click the error message.

Syntax

A semicolon follows every statement.

A statement can occupy more than one line in the script.

The configuration script does not support variables. All parameters must be given
explicitly either as numbers or as predefined symbols.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

33

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The syntax is not case sensitive.

Script statements:
ObjectInstance (addressing of object instances) . Action (Parameters);
ObjectInstance (addressing of object instances) . Set (Attribute, Parameters);
// <Comment> or /* <comment> */

An object instance is clearly identified by the following values:


ObjectClass
subrackNumber
slotReference
containerIndex
objectIndex
The ObjectClass is always given as a symbolic keyword followed by the remaining 4
values enclosed in brackets.
Example:
IFQ2G5(1, 306, 1, 1);
refers to the IFQ2G5 card in slot # 306.

A SET invoke operation on an attribute can only be invoked with an objectInstance. The
keyword "Set" is used in the statements to configure values of attributes. The syntax for
performing a SET invoke is:
objectInstance.Set (Attribute, Value).
Example:
IFS2G5(1, 303).Set(EnableTransferHistoryFileAfterStartup,enabled);

An action can only be invoked with an objectInstance. The keyword "Action" is used in
the statements to perform action invokes. The syntax for performing an ACTION invoke
is:
objectInstance.Action (Parameters);
Example:
EquipmentManager(1,211,1,1).ConfigureRequiredEquipping(((1, 306),
CardEquipped((IFS10G,"MspProtection"))));

The "Wait" command allows the user to specify a certain amount of time that the script
configuration execution procedure must hold before executing the next command or
commands. The syntax for the Wait command is:
Wait(<time interval between 1 to 10000 seconds>);
Example: Wait(1000);

The "Loop" command allows the user to specify blocks of instructions that must be
repeated a certain number of times. It adds to the scripting functionality the support of
execution cycles. The syntax for the Loop command is:
Loop(<number of times to repeat the block between 1 to 10000 or * to repeat until a
user stop>);
<Qst command 1>;
...
<Qst command n>;
EndLoop;
Examples:
Loop(50);
ne(1,254,1,1,1).Set(powerSupplyDuplication,enabled);
EndLoop;
Loop(*);

34

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

faultManager(1,254,1,1,1).Set(f4nIntegrationTime,(secondValues(3),11));
EndLoop;

Syntax for the complex QST types:


SEQUENCE
(element 1, element 2, ... element n)
SEQUENCE OF BYTE
(byte 1, byte 2, ... byte n) or (<text>)
Example for ACTION:
ethernetLinkage(1,511).createReachableAddressEthernet(("SIEMENSAG"),
0x1, external, (0x11, 0x22,0x33,0x44,0x55,0x66), enabled);
SET OF
(element 1, element 2, ..., element n)
CHOICE
<choice tag>, <QST type associated with the given choice tag>
Example:
vcCo().connect(unprotectedUni, (SF2G5(1,309,2,1),SF2G5(1,309,2,3)));

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

35

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

4 Extension Shelf
4.1 Extension Shelf Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Configuration -> Extension Shelf...

This window allows to configure existing microshelves. The corresponding tab(s) will be
added to the Module View.
The main shelf name (see table below) appears as Subrack 1.

Subrack ID

Subrack Type

Main Shelf

Microshelf #1

Microshelf #2

Microshelf #3

Microshelf #4

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

4.2 ESM-CORE Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View of a microshelf (subrack 2 or higher), by using
the context menu of an ESM-CORE card symbol -> Configuration...

Card State
Displays the card state.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
Master System Microshelf
Displays if the microshelf is used as a master system.

38

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

5 Subrack Equipping
5.1 Possible Equipping Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Information -> Possible Equipping...

This window displays the possible equipping of the NE. It gives information about the possible
equipping of every slot with cards.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

39

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

5.2 Actual Equipping Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Information -> Actual Equipping...

This window displays the actual equipping of the NE. It gives information about the equipping
of the slots. This information is displayed hierarchically by means of a list control to ensure
that the desired information can be found efficiently.

40

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

5.3 Card Inventory Summary

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Information -> Card Inventory Summary...

This window displays - in addition to NE name and location - detailed information about all
configured cards:
ordering / serial numbers and the used frequencies.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

41

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

5.4 Protection Shelf Number Config

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a IFO155M-E
card -> Configuration -> Card...

This window allows selecting the protection shelf number.

42

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

6 Card Label Information


6.1 SDH or Ethernet Interfaces Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an SDH or Ethernet interface card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

43

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

6.2 PDH Cards Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, single-row subrack or microshelf, by using the
context menu of a PDH card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

44

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

6.3 IFO155M-E Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFO155ME symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

45

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

6.4 SCOH Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

46

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

6.5 IF2M Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack
or a microshelf, by using the context menu of an IF2M card symbol -> Information -> Card
Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

47

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

6.6 IFS40G-MX Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFS40G-MX symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

48

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

6.7 Booster Cards Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFSOB card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

49

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

7 Card Configuration
7.1 Card Equipment Configuration

This window is accessible via Module View, after right-clicking the slot number symbol and
selecting a card that offers different provisioning modes.

This window allows you to set the provisioning mode (Empty, Empty-Auto, Working or
protection if available).

If Empty-Auto is selected, it is not necessary to configure the traffic interface cards explicitly.
When a traffic interface card is plugged in, the SURPASS hiT 7070 (in active NE state) will
automatically detect its hardware type and add the card to the Required Equipping list.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

51

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

7.2 SCOH Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.
EOW Active
Activates the Engineering Order Wire function.
Carries Overhead Connections
Displays the current connections.

52

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

7.3 CLU Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a CLU symbol -> Configuration...

Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
Actual Clock Master
Displays the actual clock master.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

53

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

7.4 SF160G Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an SF160G symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.
Low order switching protection states
Displays the slot number of the working card and the selected switching fabric.

54

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

7.5 SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration

These windows are accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context
menu of an SF2G5 or SF10G symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
Current Selected Switching Fabric
Displays the selected working or protecting switching fabric.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.
Carries Traffic Connections
Displays the current connections.
Carries Overhead Connections
Displays the current connections.
Note:
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

55

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The maximum number of SF2G5 cards in the subrack is limited to 4 working and 4 protecting
cards.
The maximum number of SF10G cards in the subrack is limited to 4 working and 4 protecting
cards.

56

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

7.6 SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack

SF2G5 / SF10G - 2Mbit Connection - Slot 301


The LO switch fabric cards SF2G5 / SF10G must be inserted at slot 301 to allow cross
connections to the 2-Mbit/s ports of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208, 211)
In case the LO switch fabric card SF2G5 / SF10G is inserted at another traffic slot, VC12
cross connections are possible but no 2-Mbit/s port of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208,
211) can be cross connected.
Workaround:
For connecting the 2 Mbit/s ports of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208, 211), insert and
configure the LO switch card SF2G5 / SF10G always at slot 301 of the SURPASS hiT 7070
SC subrack.
For cross connecting VC12 signals only, the LO switch card SF2G5 / SF10G can be inserted
and configured at any other traffic slot.

SF10G - VC4 Connection - Slot 301


Limitation:
In case the LO switch card SF10G is used at Slot 301 the VC4 containers #49, #50, #51 and
#52 are invisible.
Reason:
Those four VC4 containers are used for the fixed connection of 2-Mbit/s ports 1 - 252 (4 x 63
ports = 4x VC4) to the slot 301, so that the 2-Mbit/s cross connection can be done.
Workaround:
If all 64 VC4 containers will be needed the LO switch card SF10G has to be inserted at
another traffic slot but not on slot 301.

SF2G5/SF10G - Card Protection - Slot 301/302


In case the LO switch card SF2G5/SF10G on slot 302 shall be used as Card Protection (CP)
it has to be configured during first commissioning. Changing the card type of the LO switch
card SF2G5/SF10G on slot 302 from "working" to "protection" is not possible if cross
connections already exists.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

57

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

7.7 IF2M / IF345M Card Configuration

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a
microshelf,
via the Module View, e.g. by using the context menu of a IF2M or IF345M symbol ->
Configuration -> Card...

Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
Possible card states:
enabled; unavailable; wrong card type; wrong card version; wrong software.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.
Current Selected Low Order Switching Fabric
Displays the selected working or protecting switching fabric.

58

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Monitored channel NE
One of the channels of the card can be switched to the monitor port (PDH-in and PDH-out
simultaneously).
Monitored Channel Direction (for IF345M only)
PDH-in or PDH-out can be set.
Used in Protection
Indicates if the card is used in a protection.
AIS Insertion
Enables the AIS insertion to insert a manual AIS towards the port.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

59

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

7.8 Card Configuration for SDH Cards

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an SDH card symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
Current Selected Switching Fabric
Displays the selected working or protecting switching fabric.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.

60

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

7.9 IFS40G-MX Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the IFS40G-MX symbol -> Configuration...

Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Connection 40G Reference:


Type of Connection Reference
Relates to the fiber interconnection between the IFS40G-MX and IFS10G type cards.
Internal: Interconnection within the same NE.
External: Interconnection to another NE.
Connection Reference
In case of Internal interconnection, the connected IFS10G type cards must be configured
correctly.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

61

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

7.10 Card Configuration for ETH Cards

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.
Current Selected Switching Fabric
Displays the selected working or protecting switching fabric.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.
Carries Traffic Connections
Displays the current connections.

VLAN Concentrator Functionality State:


VLAN cards can be configured in 3 different modes:
P2P Point to Point mode
62

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Card is working as standard gigabit traffic card like IFQGBE / -E without VLAN functionality.
All 4 ETH ports are switched ON.
VLAN C VLAN Concentrator mode
Card is working in pure VLAN mode with 2 concentrators.
ETH port #1 = concentrator #1
ETH port #3 = concentrator #2
ETH port #2 and ETH port #4 are switched off in this mode
Mixed Mixed mode
Card is working in a mixed mode with
ETH port #1 and ETH port #2 running in P2P mode, without VLAN functionality.
ETH port #3 is working as VLAN concentrator #2.
ETH port #4 is switched off.
Note: A change between the 3 different modes requires a deconfiguration of the card settings
( i.e. GFP/VLAN ID assignments, ...). Only the selected template does not have to be deleted.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

63

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

7.11 IFSO* Cards Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFSOB symbol -> Configuration...

Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

64

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

7.12 Port Provisioning Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface
card -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...

In this window, you can select the working or protection mode of the card.
In case of an optical interface card:
Before a protection can be configured, the port(s) must be set to the projected protection type.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

65

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

7.13 IF2M - Port Provisioning Config

The window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface
card -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...

66

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

In this window, you can select the working or protection mode of the card.
Before a protection can be configured, the port(s) must be set to the projected protection type.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

67

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

8 Timing
8.1 Synchronous Equipment Clock Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > SEC...

In this window, you can configure timing sources that are used for synchronization. Each
timing source besides internal timing can be configured according to priorities. Internal timing
always has the lowest priority. The timing source, when available, with the highest priority is
used for the timing derivation.

A green hook or red cross symbol next to the T0 Prio field indicates the lockout state. If a
timing source is locked out (red cross), it is generally not available as a synchronization
reference.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

69

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

You can toggle the lockout state by clicking this lockout symbol separately for each T1 and T3
timing source.

Currently selected timing sources for the clock pulses T0 and T4 are displayed by means of
an arrow. The arrow displays the mode as set in the T0 and T4 configuration windows. For
further information, see below ("Forced").

The SA bit used for SSM evaluation / insertion is configurable independently for T3 and T4.
The SA bit configuration is only effective with 2-Mbit/s mode operation.

Note:
T4 Clock (T4C): The T4C output transmits a 2048 kHz signal and is squelched in case of:

Reference source is not available in fource mode

None of the configured reference sources is available in automatic or manual mode

Manually by the operator command "OFF"

In the mode "forced T0" if T0 is in holdover or free running mode

QL enabled (use SSM for selection) and the quality of the reference clock is lower than
the configured threshold; selectable thresholds are: 2-PRC, 4-SSU_T, 8-SSu_L, 11SEC, 0-off

T4 Data (T4D): The T4D output transmits a 2048 kbit/s signal (CRC4) and will be squelched
in the same cases as T4C too. For the squelch state, the clock will be diverted from T0, and
"DNU" will be inserted into the SA-bit (SA=FFh).

The modes involved are as follows:


Auto:
The system selects from the configured timing sources, according to the assigned priority, the
best clock pulse. For the same quality, the value of the set priority is decisive (1 = very good/6
= very bad/do not use).
Forced:
You can determine which timing source is used. If the selected timing source fails, a second
arrow displays Selected in the Holdover field. The Forced arrow remains on the selected
timing source. If the timing source can be used again, the second arrow disappears after
expiry of the Wait to Restore Time. Here assigned priorities have no meaning.
The jump from higher timing quality to lower timing quality is accepted immediately.
The jump back from lower timing quality to higher timing quality is only accepted after expiry
of the time set in the Wait to Restore Time box. This applies to the modes Forced and Auto.

If an existing synchronization with a configurable set of reference clock pulse sources is no


longer available, the SEC switches from synchronous operation to the Holdover mode.
If the SEC cannot be synchronized with any external clock pulse source, it changes to the
Free Running mode.

70

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Use SSM for Selection checkbox


With this attribute, you configure if the selection process of timing sources considers the
Quality Level (= enable) or not (= disable).

The received timing marker contains the timing quality of the reference timing of a received
STM signal. It is 4 bits wide and there are 16 different values. Only six of these values are
used. All other values are treated in the same way as the DNU (dont use) value. Behind the
DNU display, the received value is the displayed.

S1 (bin)

SSM (hex)

Display

Quality level

xxxx 0010

PRC

Q1

xxxx 0100

SSU-T

Q2

xxxx 1000

SSU-L

Q3

xxxx 1011

SEC

Q4

xxxx 0000

quality unknown

Q5

xxxx 1111

DNU (dont use)

Q6

How to Configure the Timing


How to Set Sync Priorities

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

71

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

8.2 T0 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > SEC... -> T0 -> Configuration...

Timing Source in Use for T0


Displays the current T0 timing source.
Requested Timing Source for T0
The T0 clock pulse can be derived from

one of the T3 clock pulses (external),

T1 clock pulses (if an SDH signal is used as timing reference),

the NE internal clock generator (free running), in case no clock input is available.

- Auto Selection is based on the quality of the available clock pulses.


- Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received quality
levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections.
- Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not override
the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.

How to Configure the Timing


T1 Configuration
T3 / T4 Configuration

72

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

8.3 T1 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > SEC... -> T1 -> Configuration...

Timing References Tab


Allows to select the T1 timing references and displays the dedicated Synchronous Status
Message (SSMs) information. Also it enables and displays available and selected rejected
SSMs.
WTR Tab
Displays WTR information of the T1 timing references and allows to clear the WTR.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

73

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

How to Configure the Timing


T0 Configuration
T3 / T4 Configuration

74

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

8.4 T3 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > SEC... -> T3 -> Configuration...

T3:
T3 2 MHz SSM
Allows to set the quality level of the T3 clock by selecting a timing marker.
This is necessary, because T3 as a 2.048 MHz normal timing does not contain its own SSM.
The timing marker quality level is displayed in front of the selection field.

Quality level
type

Quality level
Description
(decimal value)

PRC

Primary Reference Clock:


the normally used high-accuracy timing
source

SSU-T

Synchronization Supply Unit Transit

SSU-L

Synchronization Supply Unit Local

SEC

11

Synchronous Equipment Clock:


NE internal timing source

T3 2 Mbit Received SSM Mode


The 2-Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs in the timing signal, the 2-MHz mode does
not support this handling.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

75

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

T3 Received SSMs
Displays the received quality level information.

Clear WTR T3(1) / T3(2) SSM


Allows to clear the T3(1) and T3(2) WTR times.

How to Configure the Timing


T0 Configuration
T1 Configuration

76

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

8.5 T4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > SEC... -> T4 -> Configuration...

T4:
Timing Source in Use for T4
Displays the current T4 timing source.
In the holdover and free-running modes, the T0 clock pulse has reduced frequency and phase
quality. In this case, the T4 clock pulse is switched off (squelched).
Requested Timing Source for T4
- Auto Selection is based on the quality of the available clock pulses.
- Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received quality
levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections.
- Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not override
the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.
- Off disconnects the T4 output.
T4 Mode
The 2-Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs in the timing signal, the 2-MHz mode does
not support this handling.
Minimum Quality Level for T4
Allows to set the minimum quality level of the T4 clock by selecting a timing marker (see
above table).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

77

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

How to Configure the Timing


T0 Configuration
T1 Configuration

78

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

9 Alarms
9.1 Alarm List

This window is accessible via its toolbar button

The window displays the alarm information concerning the whole NE in detail.

The window contains a Current and a History tab. Each tab contains a list containing alarm
entries and checkboxes for setting filter options for the list. The list uses the option report style
for labeling and sorting the list columns.
In the list, one list entry (one line) corresponds to one alarm.
Current tab:
The tab always displays the actually raised alarms. The actual alarm state
(acknowledged/unacknowledged) and the alarm severity are displayed. Filter checkboxes
(show alarms with severity) for the alarm severities and the alarm states are available.
One alarm entry of the current alarm list consists of:

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

79

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Column

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object

Object name

Location

<card name>_<slot number> (.<port number> <bit rate> #<channel


number>)

Alarm

Alarm name

Severity

Level of severity - critical, major, minor and warning

State

Either unacknowledged or acknowledged

Time

Date and time of alarm

Additionally, if the alarm is unacknowledged, the alarm indicator is displayed with a blue
outline.
Context Menu
Each single alarm entry or multiple list entries of the current list can be selected. For the
selected list entries a context menu is available (right mouse click). It provides the alarm
acknowledge. If an alarm is acknowledged, the displayed state of the existing list entry is
changed. If an alarm is cleared, the corresponding list entry is deleted from the current tab.

Show alarms with severity


You can select, which alarm severity has to be displayed.
Show alarms with state
You can select, whether acknowledged or unacknowledged alarms are displayed.
Alarm Counter
Displays the number of alarms that are counted according to their severity.

History tab:
The tab is a historical log containing all alarm events notified by the NE for the time the LCT is
online. Only filter checkboxes for the alarm severities are available. The list contains one
particular list entry for each notified alarm event of one alarm
raised
cleared (= no alarm)

80

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The VC alarms are reported by the interface/switching cards. The assignment IPUchannel/Interface card take place by a list.
The alarm suppression has no influence to the HEL (History Event Log) entry.
Alarm entries contained in the history list are not deleted or overwritten.
One alarm entry of the history alarm list consists of:

Column

Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object

Object name

Location

<slot number> (.<port number> (<channel number>)

Alarm

Alarm name

Severity

Level of severity - critical, major, minor and warning

Event

raised, cleared

Time

Time and date of alarm.

Show alarms with severity


The alarm severity is displayed and can be selected.
Click Clear History to clear the entire list.

How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling


How to Suppress Alarms
SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

81

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

TIF Fault Clearance

82

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

9.2 NEAP Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Configuration -> NEAP...

The window gives an overview of the possible alarms with their most important details and
allows to configure the alarm severities.

Column

Description

Alarm Type

Communication or Equipment

Location

Logical correlation or signal type

Alarm Name

Alarm designation

Object

Involved path or unit

Severity

Major, Minor, or No

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

83

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

9.3 Equipment Alarms

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
or of a card symbol -> Fault -> Equipment Alarms...

This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm
information. The window displays all equipment alarm information concerning this
object/container in detail.

The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.

84

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

One alarm entry consists of:

Column

Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object

Object name

Alarm

Alarm name

Severity

Level of severity: major, minor, warning or "without alarm"

State

Either unacknowledged, acknowledged or no alarm

Suppression

A suppressed alarm is not shown in the Alarm List or by the


red color of the symbol.

No Alarm Report

(Only with communication alarms that support reporting)


An alarm with disabled alarm report is shown in the Alarm List
or by the red color of the symbol.

Time

Alarm date and time

The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity
threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.

How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling


How to Suppress Alarms
Communication Alarms
SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

85

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

9.4 Communication Alarms

This window is accessible via the Port Connections (using the context menu of an optical
interface card symbol in the port list) -> Subview ...-> STM-n -> Fault -> Communications
Alarms...

This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm
information. The window displays all communication alarm information concerning this
object/container in detail.

The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.
One alarm entry consists of:

Column

Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object

Object name

Alarm

Alarm name

86

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Severity

Level of severity: major, minor, warning or "without alarm"

State

Either unacknowledged, acknowledged or no alarm

Suppression

A suppressed alarm is not shown in the Alarm List or by the


red color of the symbol.

No Alarm Report

(Only with communication alarms that support reporting)


An alarm with disabled alarm report is shown in the Alarm List
or by the red color of the symbol.

The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity
threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.

Notes:
LofDel alarm will also be raised if the other end of the VC-path is terminated on an IFOFES-E
card and is not assigned to any port.
VC3 LOM will be raised, if a cross connection exists, but the relating virtual concatenated VC
is not assigned with the IFOFES-E card at the far end.

How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling


How to Suppress Alarms
Equipment Alarms
SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

87

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

9.5 Communication Alarm Feature Table


IMPORTANT!
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL manual (Operator
Guidelines).

Communication Alarms

Object

Alarm

ETH OPT TTP

Description

Remedial Action

FE Link Down Major

Problem on the
remote Ethernet
termination

Fault not in the home


device.

ETH OPT TTP

Link Down

Major

Ethernet interface fail

Check the Ethernet


connection of the
concerned card.
If it is correct, the card
must be replaced.

ETH OPT TTP

Remote

Major

Fault indication from


client

Check client equipment

ETH OPT TTP

TD

Major

Transmit Degraded

Replace the concerned


SFP soon.

ETH OPT TTP

TF

Major

Transmit Fail

Replace the concerned


SFP.

ETH EL TTP

FE Link Down Major

Problem on the
remote Ethernet
termination

Fault not in the home


device.

ETH EL TTP

Link Down

Major

Ethernet interface fail

Check the Ethernet


connection of the
concerned card.
If it is correct, the card
must be replaced.

ETH EL TTP

Remote

Major

Fault indication from


client

Check client equipment

GFP Group

LofDel

Major

Delineation problem
of the GFP Group

Check the quality of both,


the SDH and the Ethernet
traffic

3/9 o Clock

LofDel

Major

Delineation problem
of the GFP Group
serving the ring
interfaces of RPR

Check the quality of both,


the SDH and the Ethernet
traffic

MS

AIS

Minor

Alarm Indication
Signal

Fault not in home device.

88

Severity

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

MS

SD

Minor

Signal Degraded

Put the card into a loop


circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

MS

SSF

Minor

Server Signal Fail

Check the concerned


configuration settings.

MS

RDI

Warning

Remote Defect
Indicator

Check the output signal of


the card, which may have
prompted the RDI alarm. If
it is correct, the concerned
card must be replaced.

AU4

LOP

Major

Loss of Pointer

Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

SYNC

LTI T0

Major

Loss of Timing Input


T0

Check the timing input. If it


is correct, the card must
be replaced.

SYNC

LOF T3 #1,#2 Minor

Loss of Frame

Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

SYNC

LOM T3
#1,#2

Minor

Loss of Multiframe

Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

SYNC

LT4

Minor

Loss of T4

Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

SYNC

LTI T4

Minor

Loss of Timing Input


T4

Check the timing input. If it


is correct, the card must
be replaced.

SYNC

LTS T1 #1..
#8

Minor

Loss Of Timing Signal Check the input signal of


T1 #1.. #8
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

SYNC

LTS T3 #1 #2

Minor

Loss Of Timing Signal Check the input signal of


T3 #1, #2
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

OS,
OS-CO,
OS-PA

LOS

Major

Loss of Signal

Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

OS,
OS-CO,
OS-PA

TxFail

Major

Transmit Fail

Replace the concerned


SFP.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

89

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

OS,
OS-CO,
OS-PA

TxDeg

Minor

Transmit Degraded

Replace the concerned


SFP soon.

RPR Switch

RPR 3o
Clock Span
Fail

Minor

Link failure at 3 o'


clock span

Fault not in the home


device.

RPR Switch

RPR 9o
Clock Span
Fail

Minor

Link failure at 9 o'


clock span

Fault not in the home


device.

RPR Switch

FOT

Major

Fail of topology

Fault not in the home


device.

RPR-LOGPORT

FE Link Down Major

Problem on the
remote Ethernet
termination

Fault not in the home


device.

RS

TIM

Major

Trace Identifier
Mismatch

Check the Trail Trace


Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.

RS

LOF

Minor

Loss of Frame

Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

RS

LOF

Major

Loss of Frame

Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

TU

LOP

Major

Loss of Pointer

Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

VC4 (CTP)

TIM

Major

Trace Identifier
Mismatch

Check the Trail Trace


Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.

VC4 (CTP)

UNEQ

Major

Unequipped VC4

Fault not in home device.

VC4 (CTP)

SD

Minor

Signal Degraded

Put the card into a loop


circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

VC4 (TTP)

LOM

Major

Loss of Multiframe

Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

VC4 (TTP)

PLM

Major

Pay Load Mismatch

Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

90

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

VC4 (TTP)

TIM

Major

Trace Identifier
Mismatch

Check the Trail Trace


Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.

VC4 (TTP)

UNEQ

Major

Unequipped VC4

Fault not in home device.

VC4 (TTP)

SD

Minor

Signal Degraded

Put the card into a loop


circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

E12

LOS

Major

Loss of Signal

Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

P12 Dem

LOF

Major

Loss of Frame

Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

P12 Dem

AIS

Minor

Alarm Indication
Signal

Fault not in home device.

P12 Dem

EXC

Minor

Excessive bit error


rate

Put the card into a loop


circuit. If the alarm
persists, replace the card.

P12 Map

LOF

Major

Loss of Frame

Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

P12 Map

EXC

Minor

Excessive bit error


rate

Put the card into a loop


circuit. If still an EXC alarm
is detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

P12 Map

SD

Minor

Signal Degraded

Put the card into a loop


circuit. If still an SD alarm
is detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

VC12

PLM

Major

Pay Load Mismatch

Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

VC12

TIM

Major

Trace Identifier
Mismatch

Check the Trail Trace


Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.

VC12

UNEQ

Major

Unequipped VC12

Fault not in home device.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

91

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

VC12

SD

Minor

Signal Degraded

Put the card into a loop


circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

VC3

TIM

Major

Trace Identifier
Mismatch

Check the Trail Trace


Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.

VC3

UNEQ

Major

Unequipped VC3

Fault not in home device.

VC3

SD

Minor

Signal Degraded

Put the card into a loop


circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance


SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance
NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance

92

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

9.6 E3/VC3 Alarms

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack port list,
by using the context menu of an IF345M card port symbol -> Subview... -> E3/VC3 -> Fault ->
Communication Alarms...

This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm
information. The window displays all communication alarm information concerning this
object/container in detail.

The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.
One alarm entry consists of:

Column

Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object

Object name

Alarm

Alarm name

Severity

Level of severity: major, minor, warning or "without alarm"

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

93

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

State

Either unacknowledged, acknowledged or no alarm

Suppression

A suppressed alarm is not shown in the Alarm List or by the


red color of the symbol.

No Alarm Report

(Only with communication alarms that support reporting)


An alarm with disabled alarm report is shown in the Alarm List
or by the red color of the symbol.

The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity
threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.

How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling


How to Suppress Alarms
Equipment Alarms
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

94

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

9.7 1:N MSP Alarms

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an SDH interface card port symbol (with created 1: N protection) -> Subview... ->
1:N MSP -> Fault -> Communication Alarms...

This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm
information. The window displays all communication alarm information concerning this
object/container in detail.

The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.
One alarm entry consists of:

Column

Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object

Object name

Alarm

Alarm name

Severity

Level of severity: major, minor, warning or "without alarm"

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

95

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

State

Either unacknowledged, acknowledged or no alarm

Suppression

A suppressed alarm is not shown in the Alarm List or by the


red color of the symbol.

No Alarm Report

(Only with communication alarms that support reporting)


An alarm with disabled alarm report is shown in the Alarm List
or by the red color of the symbol.

The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity
threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.

How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling


How to Suppress Alarms
Equipment Alarms
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

96

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

9.8 TIF Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Configuration -> TIF...

In this window, you can enter individual TIF line names and configure the TIF input polarity for
alarm activation, according to your own requirement for telemetry tasks.

How to Configure TIF Ports

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

97

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

9.9 TCA List

This window is accessible via its toolbar button

Sorting Scheme (mouse-click on the column header)


The lists on both tabs can be sorted in the following way.

Column

sorted by

Object

TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by objects in ascending order. (Entries of one
object are sorted by location, TCA, event, time.)

Location

TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by locations in ascending order. (Entries of


one location are sorted by object, alarm, event, time.)

TCA

TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by TCAs in ascending order. (Entries of one
alarm are sorted by object, location, event, time.)

Event

TCA entries are sorted to raised and cleared. (Entries of one event are sorted by
object, location, TCA, time.)

Time

The most recent TCA entry is written on the top. (Entries of one time are sorted by
object, location, TCA, event.)

Click Clear History to delete all entries in the History list.

98

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Current Tab:
The list on the Current tab contains only actually raised TCAs. The actual state (raised) is
displayed.
One TCA entry consists of:

Column

Description

Object

Object name

Location

<card name>_<slot number>.<port> (<bit rate>) <object name>

TCA

TCA name

History Tab:
The list on the History tab is a historical log that contains all TCA events notified by the NE as
long as the LCT is online.
The list contains one particular list entry for each notified TCA event of one TCA
Event: raised, cleared.
TCA entries contained in the history list are not deleted or overwritten automatically .
The displayed time is the time the NE notified the TCA event based on the NE-Time. This
time entry is not overridden by the time stamp contained in the response to a TCA request
initiated by the LCT, provided that the response contains the same TCA.
The maximum number of TCA list entries in the history TCA list is 1000 (configurable in the
Registry).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

99

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

10 Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows


10.1 STM-1 Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
IFO155M port symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.

Note:
In the headline, only the working card is shown.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

101

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

10.2 STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections by using the context menu of an IFQ622M
symbol -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

102

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

10.3 STM-4 Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
IFQ622M port symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-4 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.

Note:
In the headline, only the working card is shown.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

103

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

10.4 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol -> Subview... -> 16x AU4/VC4 -> Subview....

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

104

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

10.5 STM-16 Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
IFS2G5 port symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-16 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.

Note:
In the headline, only the working card is shown.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

105

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

10.6 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFS10G
type symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus

106

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

10.7 STM-64 Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
IFS10G port symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.

Note:
In the headline, only the working card is shown.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

107

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

10.8 ETH Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
Ethernet port symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the Ethernet traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.

Notes:
In the headline, only the working card is shown.
Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify
coherences.

108

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

10.9 E12 or E3 Traffic Flow

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the
port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M or IF345M port symbol respectively ->
Subview...

This window shows the E12 or E3 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

109

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

10.10 VC4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of the
card symbol with activated concatenation -> Configuration VC4 configuration MUX-VC4 or
VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4 #n Configuration...

VC4 Misc tab:


Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]
The entry shows how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

110

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Signal Label:
By default, the signal label is defined by the signal type (PDH, Ethernet, etc.). However, the
user can overwrite the signal label for particular applications.
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.

VC4 Trail Trace tab:


The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
There are two modes:
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.
TIM Consequent Actions
Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS into all LO VCs of this VC4. For ETH
cards, the AIS insertion causes a remote insertion towards the ETH port (Tx).
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

111

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

VC4 Mux Preparation (if offered)


Set the checkbox separately for each TUG-3 to prepare the 21 x TU-12 mux structure.

112

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

10.11 VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a switch fabric
card symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the VC4 (Mux) #n traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

113

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

10.12 VC4 Static Multiplex Traffic Flow

***DA DEFINIRE***

114

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

11 Protection Traffic Flow


11.1 1:N MSP Protected Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
interface card symbol (with protected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

115

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.2 1:N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
interface card symbol (with unprotected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context
menu.

116

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.3 STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFO155M protection symbol with prepared MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

117

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.4 STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFQ622M protection symbol with prepared MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

118

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.5 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFO155M symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

119

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.6 STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFQ622M symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections

120

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.7 STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections


How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

121

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.8 STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G type protection symbol created 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbols and gives access to its context menu.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections


How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

122

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.9 STM-1 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFO155M port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...

This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

123

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.10 STM-4 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFQ622M port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...

This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.

124

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.11 STM-16 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...

This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

125

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.12 STM-64 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of IFS10G type port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...

This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.

126

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.13 STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS2G5 protection symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING -> Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

127

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.14 STM-16 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

128

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.15 STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS2G5 protection symbol with prepared 4F-SPRING protection -> Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

129

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.16 STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G protection symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

130

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.17 STM-64 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS10G type port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) ->
Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

131

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.18 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G type protection symbol with prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP protection ->
Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

132

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

11.19 4F SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of an
IFS2G5 port symbol with created 4F-SPRING protection -> Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

133

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

12 Protection Selection Windows


12.1 VC4 Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview...

This window shows the VC4 Selection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

135

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

13 Traffic Configuration
13.1 Port Configuration

This window is accessible via the Port connections, by using the context menu of an interface
card symbol in the port list -> Port Configuration... or Configuration -> Port...

Connector Location Distributor


Here you can enter data for the port represented by the physical trail termination object
containing the connector location at distributor.
Connector Location NE
Contains the information, with which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have
been connected.
Port Operational State
Displays the running operation mode.
Loopback (if applicable)
Selection to enable or to disable internal loops.
Fibre Mode (if applicable)
Selection of the fibre mode: Dual Fibre or Single Fibre
Used in Protection (if applicable)
Indicates if the card is used in a protection.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

137

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Used as Timing Source (if applicable)


Indicates if the card is used as a timing source.
Carries Traffic Connections (if applicable)
Displays the current connections.
Carries Overhead Connections (if applicable)
Displays the current overhead connections.

138

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

13.2 Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

139

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select a port in the LP Bandwidth
Configuration table) -> Port Config...

Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
Port VLAN ID [1..4094]
Select the required Port VLAN ID number.
Frame Priority [0..7]
Specify the frame priority.
CUG Mode Selection
Select the CUG mode:
Single:
The CUG Management button is active to open the Single CUG Management
Configuration window.
Multi1:
The window is extended by the Multi1 area with the following fields:

140

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Max. Number Of CUGs


Select the max. number of CUGs.
Max. VLAN Range
Select the max. VLAN range.
CUG ID Offset [0..4093]
Select the CUG ID offset.
After clicking Apply, a warning message is displayed informing you that the traffic will
be interrupted.
After clicking Yes, the CUG Management button is active to open the Multi1 CUG
Management Configuration window.
Multi2:
The window is extended by the Multi2 area with two selection fields, to move Possible
CUG ID values to the CUG ID list.
After clicking Apply, a warning message is displayed informing you that the traffic will
be interrupted.
After clicking Yes, the CUG Management button is active to open the Multi2 CUG
Management Configuration window.

CUG Management
This button opens the appropriate CUG Management Configuration window.

PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration


PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration
PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration
How to Specify the CUG Service Class

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

141

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

13.3 STM-N Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an optical
interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-N -> Configuration...

OS tab:
Supervision
With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.
Port Monitoring State
Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.
142

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Force Laser Shutdown


The force laser shutdown immediately shuts down the laser transmitter.
Automatic Laser Shutdown
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the automatic laser shutdown. When
enabled, the laser transmitter is shut down if there is no input signal.
If the Single Fiber Mode is configured (i. e. the Tx and Rx signals are to be combined into one
single fiber), ALS should be enabled.
Laser Restart Pulse Width [2..100s]
Displays the configured time the laser is switched on during the automatic and manual laser
restart period.
Manual Laser Restart
If the manual laser restart is set, it will restart the laser manually.
No Optical Preamplifier Connected (Normal Mode) (if applicable)
The checkbox is set, if no optical preamplifier is used.
Laser Frequency
Enable the laser frequency configuration (if applicable)
SBS Suppression
Enable the SBS Suppression configuration (if applicable)

Laser Data:
Contains information about the state of the laser and the optical receiver of the optical
interface.

RS tab:
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Enabling the trail trace identifier insertion.
There are two modes:
Enabled:
received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:

received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

143

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

TIM Consequent Actions


If checkbox is set:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS.
There is no influence to PM counters.
No checkbox setting:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
Automatic Link Information
If this checkbox is enabled, the NE automatically inserts a value into the sent RS trace, which
defines the source port. This feature shall be used for automatic link detection.

Actually Transmitted:
This string is the RS trace generated by the NE, for use with automatic link detection.

Transmitted / Expected:
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G.831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received:
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

MS tab:
M0 Byte Enable Switch
Disable: only M1-byte is used for REI transmission
Enable: additional M0-byte is used for REI transmission
Note: In case of interworking with SL64, disable the M0-byte switch.

Received Timing Marker


Contains the timing quality of the reference timing of a received STM signal. It is 4 bits wide
and there are 16 different values. Only six of these values are used. All other values are
treated in the same way as the DNU (dont use) value. Behind the DNU display, the received
value is the displayed.

144

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

S1 (bin)

SSM (hex)

Display

Quality level

xxxx 0010

PRC

Q1

xxxx 0100

SSU-T

Q2

xxxx 1000

SSU-L

Q3

xxxx 1011

SEC

Q4

xxxx 0000

quality unknown

Q5

xxxx 1111

DNU (dont use)

Q6

Overwrite Received SSM


The quality level of the SSM from the received STM-N can be overridden by different clock
source qualities before being passed to the SETS selection process.
Force dont use for Sync
By activating this checkbox, you can prevent that the other NE-Party uses this signal as
timing source.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...192000]
Specifies how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

145

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

13.4 AU4/VC4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n ->
Configuration...

AU4/VC4 Misc tab:


Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
If Supervision is active, the related vcCtp is enabled for triggering a SNCP/N.
If Supervision is inactive, the related vcCtp is enabled for triggering a SNCP/I only.
Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms]
Waiting time after an alarm, before path protection switching.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]
Displays how many blocks received per second must be errored in order to declare a Bad
Second for SD detection (if SD is cleared).
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).

146

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]


Specifies, how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

VC4 Trail Trace tab:


TTI Processing
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The two fields
expected and received TTI are displayed.
There are two modes:
Enabled:
received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:

received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.

TIM Consequent Actions


Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

147

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

13.5 VC3/VC12 Configuration CTP

For VC3:
This window is accessible via the module view, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card
symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> TU3 #n -> Configuration...
For VC12:
The window is accessible via the module view, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card
symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux
Preparation tab -> 21 x TU-12 activated -> Apply -> Close.
In the VC4 Mux #n Strukture window, select one of the numbered VC12 symbols (e.g. 1.1.1) > Configuration...

VC3 / VC12 Misc tab:


Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second (for VC3 8000, for VC12 2000)
The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of
Errored Blocks (for VC3 = B3, for VC12 = BIP2).

148

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]


Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

VC3 / VC12 Trail Trace tab:


The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The two types,
expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
There are two modes:
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored butin case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.
TIM Consequent Actions
Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria at LO switching matrix.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

149

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

13.6 VC3/VC12 Configuration TTP

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack, via the
port connections, by using the context menu of an IF345M / IF2M symbol in the port list ->
Subview... -> VC3 / VC12 -> Configuration...

VC3 / VC12 Misc tab:


Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second (for VC3 = 8000, for VC12 = 2000)
The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

150

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of
Errored Blocks (for VC3 = B3, for VC12 = BIP2).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]


Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
Signal Label:
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.

VC3 / VC12 Trail Trace tab:


The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
There are two modes:
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but, in case of TIM no TIM alarm will raise.
TIM Consequent Actions
Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption; for IF2M/IF345M with insertion of AIS towards the port, for
ETH cards with insertion of Remote towards the ETH port.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

151

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Transmitted / Expected
ASCII
The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the
range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

152

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

13.7 ETH Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an Ethernet card symbol -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Configuration

Supervision
With this field, the supervision can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.

Port Monitoring State/Port Operation State


Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state/port operation state.
If the supervision mode is automatic, the monitoring state goes enabled, as soon as a signal
at the ETH input is present. Subsequently the state stays enabled, independent whether the
ETH signal is present.

Asymmetric Flow Control (to link partner)


If the asymmetric flow control is enabled, pause frames will be generated and transmitted to
the link partner if
- ETH Rx traffic exceeds the configured bandwidth in the ETH-GFP assignment table of the
"GFP Assignment" window,
- ETH Rx traffic exceeds the configured VC capacity in the GFP-SDH assignment table of the
"GFP Assignment" window,
- with subchanneling, when the sum of Rx traffic exceeds the VC capacity.
Notes: Incoming pause frames (send by the link partner) will be dropped. Hence the NE will
not reduce the speed.
Attention: If 2 ETH ports of the SURPASS hiT 7070 are connected with each other, then the
following will occur:
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

153

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

In case of excessive ETH traffic inputs, both partners will send pause frames, but neither will
react to these pause frames. Therefore, frames may be lost with high bit rate und different
admission control or VC capacity.

Auto-negotiation (only with IFQGBE, IFQGBEB, IFOFE-E or IFOFES-E card)


Normal position is "On advertised 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s". Only for older LAN / WAN
equipment which didnt support an "Automatic Negotiation Control" the setting should be "Off
Forced 10 Mbit/s" or "Off Forced 100 Mbit/s".

Remote Fault Indication


Enabled:
Remote fault will be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, if the SDH route is disturbed, or
the ETH port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If Remote is inserted, the ETH
link partner raises Remote alarm.
Furthermore, in case Remote fault is to be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, the MAC on
the cards will get disabled completely. Therefore no Ethernet packets are sent any longer in
both directions (i.e. neither in receive nor in transmit direction). As a consequence also the
packet performance counters in ingress direction (i.e. ETH -> SDH) will not count any longer.

Note:
If more information about faults in the SDH link are to be required, it is advisable to enable the
SSF and RDI fault indication on the Ethernet cards.
The SSF will indicate an SDH problem on the egress direction (SDH --> ETH) which will
consequently lead to the remote fault indication to the client port.
Furthermore RDI will be inserted in the SDH TX direction that will indicate the original sending
card that the downlink direction has a problem.

Disabled:
The Tx output signal will be switched OFF, if the SDH route is disturbed, or the ETH port at
the other end of the route receives Remote. If the port is switched OFF, the ETH link partner
raises LinkDown. This feature is useful if the link partner is a router which considers a
physical link down as one of the criteria for starting a re-routing process (e.g. a redundant
path is available).

Laser Data:
Input Power Level [dBm]
Displays the current input power level.
Transmit Frequency [THz]
Displays the current transmit frequency.
Receive Frequency [THz]
Displays the current receive frequency.

154

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Note: To show the frequencies in [nm], go to the Main window -> Options -> Settings... ->
Frequency Display: set to Wavelength [nm]. This feature is not applicable for 100 FX Agilent
SFPs.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

155

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

13.8 E12 Configuration

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack, port list,
by using the context menu of an IF2M port symbol -> Subview... -> E12 -> Configuration...

Supervision
With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.

Port Monitoring State


Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.

P12
AIS Insertion Towards Port
The AIS insertion to E12 allows to insert a manual AIS towards the PDH port.

156

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

P12 Mapping Supervision


Port Connection Supervision
disabled = no supervision
enabled = supervision on SD, EXC and LOF in mapping direction
The supervision is only relevant, if the port monitoring is enabled.
If the incoming 2-Mbit/s signal is used as timing source for the clock pulses T0 and
T4, the signal must be framed and the port connection supervision must be enabled.
CRC-4 Monitoring
This attribute allows to enable/disable the CRC monitor function in mapping direction.
If the switch is
disabled, no CRC-4 communication alarm will be generated. The CRC processing is
only relevant, if the port connection supervision and the port monitoring are enabled.

P12 Demapping Processing


Supervision/Retiming
This attribute allows to enable the retiming function for outgoing 2 Mbit/s signals. If enabled,
the 2-Mbit/s signal in mapping direction is synchronized to the T0 clock. The signal is then
supervised on AIS, EXC and LOF. If disabled, the outgoing 2-Mbit/s signal is not supervised
and is transmitted transparently.
The retimed signal can have frame slips, these slips depends on the frequency offset
between the origin PDH signal and the T0. If retiming is enabled, the T0-configuration of the
SEC-configuration is not to be configured as "Free Running" or "Holdover" mode. So a
reference clock source must be available. If not the outgoing 2-Mbit/s signal will have AIS.
CRC-4 Insertion/Monitoring
This attribute allows to enable/disable the CRC processing function in demapping direction. If
the checkbox is Disabled, no CRC-4 communication alarm will be generated. The CRC
Processing attribute is only relevant, if the retiming Switch Demapper NE and the termination
port monitoring are enabled. The supervision of AIS, EXC and LOF is only relevant, if the
termination port monitoring is enabled.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

157

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

13.9 E3 Configuration

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a
microshelf, port list, by using the context menu of an IF345M port symbol -> Subview... -> E3
-> Configuration...

Supervision
With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.

Port Monitoring State


Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.

P3
AIS Insertion Towards Port
The AIS insertion to P3 allows to insert a manual AIS towards the PDH port.

158

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

13.10 IFSOA Config

{bmct ifsoa-pdc.bmp}

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an xxxxxx card symbol -> Information ->

Connector Location Distributor


Here you can enter data for the port represented by the physical trail termination object
containing the connector location at distributor.
Connector Location NE
Contains the information, with which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have
been completed.
Port Operational State
Displays the running operation mode.
Connection Reference
Type of Connection Reference
Relates to the fiber interconnection between the cards
Internal: Interconnection within the same NE.
External: Interconnection to another NE
Connection Reference
In case of Internal Interconnection, the connected I cards must be configured correctly.
Optical Input Power
Displays the current input power level.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

159

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Force Laser Shutdown


The force laser shutdown immediately shuts down the laser transmitter.

160

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

14 Multiplex Structure
14.1 VC4 Multiplex Structure

This window is accessible via the Module View in the port list, by the context menu of a
PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a VC4 (Mux)
#n symbol [with activated mux structure]) -> Subview...

This window shows the VC4 Mux traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

161

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

15 Cross Connections
15.1 Cross Connections List

This window is accessible via its toolbar button

or via the Main Menu -> CrossConnections -> CC List...

In this window, you can set filter options and add, delete and display CCs (cross
connections).
There are different CC types as follows:
1. Unidirectional (unprotected) CC, with CP parameter set:
CP1, indicating the CP used as connection start point
CP2, indicating the CP used as connection end point
2. Bidirectional (unprotected) CC, with CP parameter set:
CP1, indicating the 1st CP used as connection start/end point
CP2, indicating the 2nd CP used as connection start/end point
3. Unidirectional (protected for SNCP) head end CC, with CP parameter set:
CP1, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start point
CP2(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection end point
CP2(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection end point
4. Unidirectional (protected for SNCP) tail end CC, with CP parameter set:
CP1(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection start point
CP1(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start point
CP2, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection end point
5. Bidirectional (protected for SNCP) CC, with CP parameter set:
CP1, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start/end point
CP2(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection start/end point
CP2(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start/end point

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

163

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

6. Combined CCs are the ones, using the Low Order SF card, which means that more
than on CC is used. This include both complete and incomplete CCs, that have more
than one CC.
7. Complete CCs are all, where traffic passes, this means those that have VC4 TPs in the
end. This can be a normal CC between two VC4 or combined CC, that use the LO SF
card.
8. Incomplete CCs are the ones, where traffic doesn't pass usually, because a CC is
missing to make a complete combined CC. This are usually CCs between a HO card
and the LO card or a combination, which includes also a CC between the LO card, but
no other CC from the LO to an HO card.

The Add... button opens the Add Cross Connection window.


After selecting an entry in the list, the Disconnect... button deletes that cross connection.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details
window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic
window.
With an IFQGBE-E, IFOFE-E or IFQGBE card cross connection, the GFP Assignment...
button opens the GFP Assignment window.
With an LNQ622M cross connection, the Link Connection... button opens the Extension Link
Protection Traffic Flow window.

How to Create a Cross Connection


How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-ETH VC3 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection
How to Add and Remove Path Protections
How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection
How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection
How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection
How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection
How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR
How to Set Cross Connection Filter Options

164

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

How to Delete a Cross Connection

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

165

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

15.2 Plain Cross Connections List

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections -> CC Plain List...

The plain cross connection list shows the real existing physical cross connections. In this
window, you can add, modify, delete and display cross connections.

The Add... button opens the Add Cross Connection window.


After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the Modify Cross Connection
window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Disconnect... button deletes that cross connection.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details
window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection
Graphic Details window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic
window.
The GFP Assignment... button opens the SDH GFP Assignment window.

How to Create a Cross Connection


How to Create an SDH-ETH VC3 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection

166

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection


How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection
How to Add and Remove Path Protections
How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection
How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection
How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection
How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection
How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR
How to Set Cross Connection Filter Options
How to Delete a Cross Connection

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

167

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

15.3 Add Cross Connection

This window is accessible e.g. via the main menu -> Cross Connections -> List... -> (select an
entry in the list) -> Add.

This window allows to create a new cross connection.

The selected CC Type is displayed graphically. A dashed line indicates the protection path.
After selecting VC Level, Card and TP, the "To TP A >>" button copies the selected TP to the
TP A field in the New CC area.
After selection another card and/or TP, the "To TP B >>" button copies the selected TP to the
TP B field in the New CC area.
After selection another card and/or TP, the "To TP B' >>" button copies the selected TP to the
TP B field in the New CC area (in case of a protected cross connection).
The Reset TPs button clears all selected TPs in the New CC area.

Note:
The VC-Level LCAS-VC12-nv/VC3-nv is a possibilty to connect the complete VC group from
the ETH card to a SDH card.
168

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

It can only be used, if the members of a VC group are adjacent (e.g. LCAS-VC12-5v 1.1.1,
1.2.1, 1.3.1, 1.2.1, 1.2.2). Otherwise the LCT connects VC12 which are not in the VC group.
In the TP index field of the TPs, the first member of the group must be selected as TP (i.e.
1.1.1 of the LCAS-VC12-5v).

The Propose Connection button defines the new connection and inserts it into the cross
connection list.
The Connect button creates the cross connection.
In the TP Selection list, the involved TPs are marked by asterisks.
The Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details window.
The Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.

How to Create a Cross Connection


How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-ETH VC3 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection
How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection
How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection
How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection
How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

169

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

15.4 Cross Connection Details

This window is accessible e.g. via the main menu -> Cross Connections -> List... -> (select an
entry in the list) -> Details...

After selecting a list entry by clicking in one of the TP columns, the selected TP is displayed
below.
The Config... button opens the AU4/VC4 Configuration window
With an IFOFE, IFOFE-E, IFOFES-E, IFOFGE, IFQGBE-E, IFQGBE, IFQGBEB or IFQGBEBE card cross connection, the GFP Assignment... button opens the GFP Assignment window.
With an LNQ622M cross connection, the Link Connection... button opens the Extension Link
Protection Traffic Flow window.

After selecting a list entry the following buttons are active:


The Modify... button opens the Modify Cross Connection window.
The Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection Graphic Details window
The Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.
The Concat members... button (if offered) opens the Concatenation Details window.

170

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

15.5 Cross Connections Graphic

This window is accessible e.g. via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections... -> Graphic...

This window is a graphical illustration of the configured cross connections and involved cards,
sorted by cross connection protocols.

The SF160G card contains the HO cross connections represented by the lines in the HO CC
column of the Graphic view. This card is not displayed by itself because it has no own
termination points.
The SF2G5 cards contain the LO cross connections represented by the lines in the LO CC
column.
If you click a graphical connecting line, the involved cards are highlighted.
Protection is not displayed in the Graphic view.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

171

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Add...
Opens the Add Cross Connection window.
List...
Opens the Cross Connections List window.

172

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

15.6 Cross Connection Graphic Details

This window is accessible via the Cross Connection List toolbar button
-> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connections list) -> Details... -> (with an entry
selected in the Cross Connection Details list) -> Graphic Details...

This window shows the TP relations of the selected cross connection. The context menus of
the symbols allow to display the Graphic Details of the next entry in the Cross Connections
List, if applicable.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

173

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

15.7 Modify Cross Connection

This window is accessible via the Cross Connection List toolbar button
-> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connections list) -> Details... -> (with an entry
selected in the Cross Connection Details list) -> Modify...

This window allows to modify the CC type and TP selection of an existing cross connection.
The Add Protection button allows to add a protection to an existing cross connection.
The Swap and Add Protection button swaps TP A and TP B termination points and adds a
TP B' termination point.
The Remove Work. Path button removes the working path of an existing protected cross
connection.
The Remove Prot. Path button removes the protecting path of an existing protected cross
connection.
The Disconnect button opens a window with a traffic interrupt warning, for disconnect the
selected connection.
The Details... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.
The Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection Graphic Details window.
The Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.

174

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

15.8 Overhead Cross Connections

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross Connections...

In this window, you can create and display various bidirectional OH Cross Connections.

OH TP List tab:
Filter:
The OH Termination Point list can be filtered by setting filter options.

The OH TP List displays all OH termination points.


Note: The OH TP List can be sorted by clicking any column heading (including the first
column).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

175

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Column

Description

(Symbol)

Indication if this TP is involved in an OH CC


or not
The symbol is marked by a blue frame, if the TP is already set as
TP A or TP B, but not yet connected.

OH Termination Point

Details about involved subrack, slot, port and card and OH type.

Connection State

Either Connected, if the termination point is involved in a Cross


Connection or Free, if the termination point is not involved.

OH CC Type

<type of TP A> - <Type of TP B>

Direction

Displays the direction type of the OH TP

Involved As

One of: TPA, TPB

If a list entry is selected, the Set as TP A button sets it as TP A for a new OH CC.
If a list entry is selected, the Set as TP B button sets it as TP B for a new OH CC.
If a list entry with connected OH CC is selected, the Select OH CC button displays details
about the OH CC in the New OH Cross Connection field.
Before a new OH CC is connected, the TP A and TP B settings can be reset using the Reset
TPs button.
The Connect button creates a new OH CC.

OH CC List tab:
Filter:
The Cross Connection list can be filtered by setting filter options.

The OH CC list displays all established Cross Connections.


Note: The OH TP List can be sorted by clicking any column heading.
One Cross Connection entry consists of:

Column

Description

OH CC Type

Cross Connection type.

Direction

Displays the direction type of the OH CC type

TP A, TP B

Termination points

176

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The Disconnect button deletes the selected OH CC from the list.

How to Create an OH Cross Connection


How to Set OH Cross Connection Filter Options
How to Delete OH Cross Connections

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

177

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

16 Protection Management
16.1 Protection Management

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol > Protection...

This window contains all prepared and created protection groups in the NE, depending on the
currently configured Required Equipping of the NE.

Column

Description

Protection Symbol

Red cross: not active; Green small hook: active

Type

Type of protection switching

Exists

either yes or no

Working/West

<slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Protection/East

<slot number> <card type> <port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Working/East

<slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Protection/West

<slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Protect. State

State of protection switching

To change to a specific Traffic Flow window, double-click the appropriate list entry.
Create
Creates the selected protection in the list.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

179

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Add 1:N MSP ...


Opens the Add 1:N MSP window.
Add Link Protection
Opens the Add Extension Link Protection window.
Delete
Deletes the selected protection in the list.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection


How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection
How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections

180

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

17 1 plus 1 MSP Protection


17.1 STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an optical interface card symbol with created 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview... -> 1+1
MSP -> Configuration...

Line Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (1 + 1).
Working
Displays the working port.
Protecting
Displays the protecting port.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

181

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

MSP Control:
Active Line Section
Displays the line that is being used, whether the working or the protecting line.
Protection Mode
In the list, the changeover type is displayed:
Revertive = returns to working after the problem in the working line has disappeared.
Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.
Operator Command
In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:
Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.
Force Clear aborts the WTR time.
Lockout prevents any 1+1 MSP protection switching.
The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
immediate protection switching.
Line Switching Type
Unidirectional or Bidirectional.
K1/K2 Protocol Type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:
Availability State
Displays whether the MS Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).
The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
Enter the wait to restore time.
MSP Activation
In the list, the protection switching function state can be selected:
Activated or De-activated.

Note:
If an IFO155M-E card protection is enabled and the working card has port loops enabled,
then in a case of protection switching the port loops from the working card are not propagated
to the protection card.

How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections

182

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

18 1 to 1 MSP Protection
18.1 1:1 MSP Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an SDH interface card port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview... > 1:1 MSP -> Configuration...

Line Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (1:1 MSP).
Working
Displays the working port.
Protecting
Displays the protecting port.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

183

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

MSP Control:
Active Line Section
Displays the line that is being used, whether the working or the protecting line.
Extra Traffic Squelch State
Displays the Extra Traffic Squelch State.
Protection Mode
In the list, the changeover type is displayed:
Revertive = returns to working after the problem in the working line has disappeared.
Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.
Operator Command
In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:
Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.
Force Clear aborts the WTR time.
The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
immediate protection switching.
Lockout prevents any 1:1 MSP protection switching.
Exercise Switch is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can
be used for testing the K1/K2 protocol
Line Switching Type
Unidirectional or Bidirectional.
K1/K2 Protocol Type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:
Availability State
Displays whether the MS Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).
The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
Enter the wait to restore time.
MSP Activation
In the list, the protection switching function state can be selected:
Activated or De-activated.

Note:
If an IFO155M-E card protection is enabled and the working card has port loops enabled,
then in a case of protection switching the port loops from the working card are not propagated
to the protection card.

184

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

19 1 to N MSP Protection
19.1 1:N MSP Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> 1:N MSP ->
Configuration...

Line Architecture
Displays 1:N line architecture.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

185

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Protecting
Displays the protection card and port.
Working:
The list displays the port and allows to configure some protection settings.
The Extend... button opens the 1:N MSP Extension window.
The Reduce button removes the port from the list.

MSP Control:
Switching State
Displays the switching state.
Protection Mode
Displays the changeover type:
Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.
Operator Command
Allows to set the priority of the protection switching:
Clear (abort the WTR) requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.
Lockout prevents any 1:N MSP protection switching.
The Forced To command has a higher priority than the Manual To command. They request
immediate protection switching.
Exercise To is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be
used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.
Operator Command Port
Displays the operator command port.
Line Switching Type
Displays the line switching type.
K1/K2 Protocol Type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type.
Availability State
Displays whether the MS Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).
The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min]
Allows to configure the Wait to Restore Time.
MSP Activation
Allows to select the protection switching function state.

186

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Note:
If an IFO155M-E card protection is enabled and the working card has port loops enabled,
then in a case of protection switching the port loops from the working card are not propagated
to the protection card

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

187

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

19.2 Add 1:N MSP

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add 1:N MSP...

Bitrate
Allows to set the bit rate level.
Protection Port
Allows to select a protection port, if applicable.
Working Ports:
This area lists the selected working ports and allows to configure them, as long as the
corresponding 1:N protection is not yet activated.
The Add... button opens the Add Working Ports window.
After a port is added, you can configure the port number and the Low or High priority.
The Delete button removes the selected port from the list.
The Apply button transfers the configured port(s).to the Protection Management list.

188

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

19.3 1:N MSP Extension

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with created 1:N MSP) in the port list ->
Subview... -> 1:N MSP -> Configuration... -> Extend...

Worker Section Number


Displays the worker section number.
Worker Priority
Allows to configure the worker priority.
Additional Working Port
Allows to configure an additional working port.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

189

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

19.4 Add Working Ports

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add 1:N MSP... -> Add...

After a port is marked in the Possible Working Ports list, it can be moved to the Selected
Working Ports list using the ">>" button, or vice versa using the "<<" button.
The Apply button copies the selected ports(s) into the Working Ports list in the Add 1:N MSP
window.

190

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

19.5 Working STM-1 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> (n x) STM-1 ->
Subview...

This window shows the (n x) STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their
context menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

191

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

19.6 Working VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...

This window shows the (n x) AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

192

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

20 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
20.1 2F SPRING Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING ->
Configuration...

This window displays information about 2F SPRING features and allows you to configure
particular items.
Note:
The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.

Ring Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

193

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

East / West
Displays the assigned ports.

2F-SPRING Control:
Active Ring Section
Displays the ring section that is being used
Protection Mode
Displays the changeover type.
Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.
Operator Command
In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:
Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.
Force Clear aborts the WTR time.
Lockout prevents any protection switching. Note that interworking with some previous
equipment (e.g. SURPASS hiT7070 Release 2.1) with respect to particular Lockout of
Protection commands is not possible.
The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
immediate protection switching.
Exerciser is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be
used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.
Ring Segmentation Mode
Enable / disable the ring segmentation mode
K1/K2 Protocol Type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:
Two Fibre Shared Ring ITU G841
Availability State
Displays whether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).
The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
Enter the wait to restore time.
MSP Activation
Activate / deactivate the MSP.

Configure Ring Topology


Opens the 2F-/4F-SPRING Topology Configuration window.
Squelch...
Opens the 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration window.

194

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

195

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

20.2 2F-SPRING Extra Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... ->
2F-SPRING X -> Configuration...

This window displays information about 2F SPRING features and allows you to configure
particular items.
Note:
The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.

Ring Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring Extra).

196

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

East / West
Displays the assigned ports.

2F-SPRING Control:
Main Traffic Active Ring Section
Displays the ring section that is being used
Extra Traffic West Squelch State
Displays the extra traffic squelch state (West)
Extra Traffic East Squelch State
Displays the extra traffic squelch state (East)
Protection Mode
Displays the changeover type.
Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.
Operator Command
In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:
Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.
Force Clear aborts the WTR time.
Lockout prevents any protection switching. Note that interworking with some previous
equipment (e.g. SURPASS hiT7070 Release 2.1) with respect to particular Lockout of
Protection commands is not possible.
The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
immediate protection switching.
Exerciser is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be
used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.
Ring Segmentation Mode
Enable / disable the ring segmentation mode
K1/K2 Protocol Type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:
Two Fibre Shared Ring ITU G841
Availability State
Displays whether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).
The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
Enter the wait to restore time.
MSP Activation
Activate / deactivate the MSP.
Note: In case of a deactivated MSP, extra traffic is not available (squelched).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

197

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Configure Ring Topology


Opens the 2F-/4F-SPRING Topology Configuration window.
Squelch...
Opens the 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration window.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

198

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

20.3 4F SPRING Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 4F-SPRING protection) -> Subview... -> 4FSPRING -> Configuration...

This window displays information about 4F SPRING features and allows you to configure
particular items.
Note:
The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

199

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Ring Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Four Fibre Shared Ring).
Working West / Protecting West / Working East / Protecting East
Displays the assigned ports.

4F-SPRING Control:
Active Ring Section East / Active Ring Section West
Displays the ring section that is being used
Protection Mode
Displays the changeover type.
Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.
Operator Command West / Operator Command East
In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:
Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.
Force Clear aborts the WTR time.
Lockout prevents any protection switching. Note that interworking with some previous
equipment (e.g. SURPASS hiT7070 Release 2.1) with respect to particular Lockout of
Protection commands is not possible.
The Forced commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
immediate protection switching.
Exerciser is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be
used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.
Ring Segmentation Mode
Enable / disable the ring segmentation mode
K1/K2 Protocol Type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:
Four Fibre Shared Ring - ITU G.841
Availability State
Displays whether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).
The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
Enter the wait to restore time.
MSP Activation
Activate / deactivate the MSP.

200

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Configure Ring Topology


Opens the 2F-/4F-SPRING Topology Configuration window.
Squelch...
Opens the 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration window.

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

201

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

20.4 2F / 4F SPRING Topology Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with installed 2F/4F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F/4F-SPRING
-> Configuration... -> Configure Ring Topology

In this window, you can configure the ring nodes with a symbolized graphical view of the ring.
Note:
The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.

202

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Number of ring nodes [3..16]


Enter the number of the ring nodes.
In the graphical display, nodes that are not used are grayed out.
Own Node ID [0..15]
Enter your own node ID.
Ring Map
Select a node ID for each ring node. The node ID must be unique within the ring.

2F-SPRING Configuration
2F-SPRING Extra Configuration
4F-SPRING Configuration
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

203

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

20.5 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F/4F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F/4F-SPRING
-> Configuration... -> Squelch...

Squelch Event Report Control


Allows to enable / disable the squelch event report control.
Squelch State
Displays the Receive / Transmit West / East squelch states for each AU4.
Squelch Table
Allows to configure the Node IDs for each AU4 in Receive and Transmit directions.

204

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

20.6 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 8 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

205

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

20.7 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

206

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

20.8 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... -> n
x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

207

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

20.9 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 4F SPRING protection -> Subview ... -> 32x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview ...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

208

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

20.10 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS10G symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 32 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

209

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

20.11 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS10G symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

210

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

20.12 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS10G port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... ->
64x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

211

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

20.13 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G symbol with created 4F SPRING protection -> Subview ...-> 128x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview ...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

212

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

20.14 <2F or 4F> Spring or Spring X Nut Config

This window is accessible via the context menu card where SPRING protection is configured > Protection... -> double click on the line of the wished spring protection -> select
Configuration in the context menu of the SPRING symbol -> Nut... push-button

Nut table
It is possible for the selected AU4 No. to enable or disable the Ring Switch, Span switch.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

213

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

20.15 4F-Spring X Config

***DA DEFINIRE***

Ring Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring Extra).
Working West / Protecting West / Working East / Protecting East
Displays the assigned ports.
Main Traffic Active Ring Section
Displays the ring section that is being used
Extra Traffic West Squelch State
Displays the extra traffic squelch state (West)

214

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Extra Traffic East Squelch State


Displays the extra traffic squelch state (East)
Protection Mode
Displays the changeover type.
Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.
Operator Command
In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set.
Ring Segmentation Mode
Enable / disable the ring segmentation mode
K1/K2 protocol type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type: Two Fibre Shared Ring ITU G841
Availability State
Displays wether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked). The Locked
state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive)
Enter the wait restore time.
MSP Activation
Activate / deactivate the MSP.
Note: In case of deactivated MSP, extra traffic is not available (squelched).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

215

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

21 Link Protection
21.1 Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview...

This window shows the Main ISTM 4 and if applicable the ESM ISTM 4 traffic flow symbol and
gives access to their context menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

217

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

21.2 Extension Link Protection Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an LNQ622M port symbol (with installed link protection) -> Subview... -> I-LINKPROT -> Configuration...

Working
Displays the working card and port.
Protecting
Displays the protecting card and port

Extension Link Protection Control:


Active Link Section
Displays the active link section.
Operator Command
Allows to select a protection command to be performed.

218

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

21.3 Add Extension Link Protection

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add Link Protection...

Main Shelf:
Working Port
Allows to select the working port.
Connected to Extension Shelf
Displays the connection status.
Protecting Port
Allows to select the protecting port.
Connected to Extension Shelf
Displays the connection status.

Extension Shelf:
SUBRACK
Allows to select the subrack.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

219

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Working Port
Displays the working port.
Protecting Port
Displays the protecting port.

220

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

21.4 ISTM 4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview... -> Configuration

Supervision
With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.
Port Monitoring State
Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.
Received . . . Connection:
Port
Displays the port.
Identifier
Displays the identifier
Connection Identifier (only for LNQ622M card)
With this field, the connection identifier can be selected.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

221

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

21.5 ESM ISTM 4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview... -> Configuration

Supervision
With the field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.
Port Monitoring State
Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.
Received . . . Connection:
Port
Displays the port.
Identifier
Displays the identifier
Connection Identifier (only for LNQ622M card)
With this field, the connection identifier can be selected.

222

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

22 Concatenations
22.1 VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration...
-> VC4 Mux Preparation.
Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... ->
Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv ->
Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC12 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

223

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

22.2 Virtual 2x VC3 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5
symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC3-2v > Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC3 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

224

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

22.3 Virtual 4x VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of a
IFQGBE port symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview ...-> n x VC4 ->
[VC4] Subview ... -> VC4-4v -> Subview

This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

225

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

22.4 Virtual 7x VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFQGBE symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 32 x VC4 ->
VC4 Subview... -> VC4-7v -> Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

226

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

22.5 Virtual 16x VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G symbol with VC4-16v concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview... -> VC4-16v #n -> Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

227

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

22.6 Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview ...-> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview ... -> VC4-64v -> Subview

This window shows the Virtual AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

228

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

22.7 Concatenated VC4 Configuration

{bmct 15201a.bmp}

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by the context menu of a
PF2G5 card symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> n x VC4 or n x AU4/VC4 ->
(VC4) Subview ... -> VC4-nv or VC4-nc -> Configuration...

This window shows the concatenation type and gives access to the configuration menu.

In Case of Virtual Concatenation VC4-nv


VC4-nv Misc:
Supervision
Supervision of the VC4 signals is active, if checkbox is set.
Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms] (if applicable)
Waiting time after an alarm, before path protection switching.
Concatenation Type
Displays the concatenation type.

In Case of Contiguous Concatenation VC4-nc


VC4-nc Misc tab:
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

229

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms] (if applicable)


Waiting time after an alarm, before path protection switching.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]
The entry shows how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received
errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No.
of Errored Blocks (B3).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD
alarm (Signal Degrade alarm).
Concatenation Type
Displays the selected type of contiguous concatenation.

VC4-nc Trail Trace tab:


The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three
types transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are
displayed.
TTI Processing
Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM
signal.
There are two modes:
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.
TIM Consequent Actions
Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

230

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII
characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the
required subset of characters according to G831. Any remaining characters (which
are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The
1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

231

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

22.8 VC12-2v Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration...
-> VC4 Mux Preparation.
Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... ->
Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv ->
Subview...

VC12-2v Misc:
Supervision
Supervision of the VC12 signals is active, if checkbox is set.
Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms]
Allows to enter the path protection hold-off time.
Concatenation Type
Displays the concatenation type.

232

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

22.9 VC3-2v Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by the context menu of a
PF2G5 card symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> n x VC4 -> VC4 Subview
...-> VC4 (Mux) -> Subview... -> VC3-2v -> Configuration...

This window shows the concatenation type and gives access to supervision configuration.

VC3-2v Misc:
Supervision
Supervision of the VC3 signals is active, if checkbox is set.
Concatenation Type
Displays the concatenation type.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

233

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

22.10 Concatenation Configuration

The windows are accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu
of an
ETH cards and SF2G5/SF10G:
Card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...

234

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

SDH cards:
Port symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...

This window allows you to select templates for concatenation groups.

Note:
With the PF2G5, IFOFE, IFOFE-E, IFQGBE, IFQGBEB, IFQGBEB-E and IFQGBE-E cards,
the user must select a template (see below).
For LO switching fabric SF10G/SF2G5 and IFOFES-E, the user has to configure first the VC4
multiplex structure. Otherwise only VC3 concatenations are possible.
IFOFES-E:
(via the context menu of the IFOFES-E card) Configuration -> VC4 Configuration -> 2x VC4 > VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux
Preparation). The default configuration is VC3 with both VC4s of the IFOFES-E card.
A VC12-nv can only consist of VC12 containers that originate from the same VC4.
With VC3-2v, both VC3 containers must originate from the same VC4.
SF2G5/SF10G:
(via the context menu of the SF2G5/SF10G card) -> Subview... -> nx VC4 selection window > VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation). The
default configuration is VC3 with all VC4s.

If an entry in the list is selected, the Details... button opens the Concatenation Details
window.
The Add... button (if offered) opens the Add Concatenation Group window.
The Delete button (if offered) deletes the selected entry.
The Modify LCAS... button (if offered) opens the Modify LCAS Concatenation Group window.
The Template... button (if offered) opens the Concatenation Group Templates selection
window.
The Modify Template (if offered) button allows a member shift between two neighboured
VC4-nv groups.
The Delete Template... button (if offered) deletes all concatenation groups.

Note: You can select a template only if the card is not yet in service (i.e. no payload
transmitted, no cross connection created, no GFP group assigned to SDH signals).

The following templates are available:

For the PF2G5 card:


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

235

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Template 1 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 2xVC4-4v, 1xVC4-3v)


Template 2 (3xVC3, 3xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 3xVC4-4v)
Template 3 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 1xVC4-2v)
Template 4 (3xVC3, 3xVC3-2v, 3xVC4, 1xVC4-4v)

For the IFOFE / IFOFE-E card:


Template 5 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4)
Template 6 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4-5v, 1xVC4-4v)
Template 7 (6xVC3, 6xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)
Template 8 (8xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)
Template 9 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 4xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)
Template 10 (8xVC3, 2xVC3-2v, 3xVC4-4v)
Template 16 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 2xVC4-6v)

For the IFQGBE / IFQGBEB card and the IFQGBE-E / IFQGBEB-E card:
Template 11 (4xVC4, 4xVC4-7v)
Template 12 (2xVC4, 4xVC4-4v, 2xVC4-7v)
Template 13 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 6xVC4, 2xVC4-4v, 2xVC4-7v)
Template 14 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 3xVC4-4v, 2xVC4-7v)
Template 17 (4xVC4-8v)
Template 18 (14xVC3, 14xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 2xVC4-8v)
Template 19 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 3xVC4-8v)
Template 20 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 2xVC4-4v, 1xVC4-8v)

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

236

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

22.11 Concatenation Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a packet switch card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation..., select via Template button
a template -> Apply; select a line from the list and press the Details button

This windows displays details about the selected concatenation group.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

237

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

22.12 Add Concatenation Group

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add...

Concatenation Type
Select the required type from the list.
Group ID
Enter the group ID. It depends on the card type.
Available TPs / Selected TPs
Select the required TPs and click >> to move them into the Selected TPs list.

238

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

22.13 Concatenation Group Templates

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an Ethernet card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Template...

This window offers some proven concatenation group templates to ease the configuration.
Note: You can select a template only if the card is not yet in service (i.e. no payload
transmitted, no cross connection created, no GFP group assigned to SDH signals).
Note: If a VC4-nv is to be generated, the selected template must contain two VC4-4v.
Note: For VLAN operation modes, only templates containing VC3 or VC3-2v should be
selected. High order VCs (VC4 and VC4-nv) cannot be assigned to VLAN concentrators.

GFP Assignment
How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

239

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

22.14 Modify Template

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFOFE-E card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... (select an entry in the list) ->
Modify Template...

This window can be used to generate VC4-nv containers.

Note:
Only two VC4-4v can be changed in one template.
Two VC4-nv can be generated, but the sum must always be eight VC4s.

240

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

22.15 VCLO-Concatenation Configuration

***DA DEFINIRE***

Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms]


Allows to enter the path protection hold-off time.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

241

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

23 VLAN
23.1 VLAN Functionality

General remarks on VLAN functionality


VLAN functionality is supported by the IFQGBEB (optical) and IFQGBEB-E (electrical) cards.
These card types can be configured in 3 different modes.

1. Point to point mode (P2P)


All 4 ETH ports working P2P like IFQGBE /-E cards.
2. VLAN C mode
Cards are running with 2 independent VLAN Concentrators:
VLAN C1 on gigabit ETH port #1
VLAN C2 on gigabit ETH port #3
ETH ports #2 and #4 are switched OFF in this mode.
There is a fixed relation between Concentrator -- GFP Group -- VC as follows:
ETH port #1 - VLAN C1 -- GFP group #1 - #8 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 1-16.
ETH port #3 - VLAN C2 -- GFP group #9 - #16 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 17-32.
3. Mixed Mode
Cards are running with 2 ports point to point (P2P) mode and one port with VLAN
concentrator functionality as follows:
ETH port #1 and #2 - P2P mode -- GFP group #1 or #2 -- AU channels of range 1-16
ETH port #3 - VLAN C2 -- GFP group #9-16 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 17-32
ETH port #4 - switched OFF
Change between the 3 different modes requires a deconfiguration of the already applied
card configuration.

Uplink and Downlink functionality


On VLAN modes it is distinguished between uplink and downlink.
Uplink is related to the gigabit ports ETH #1 and #3 of IFQGBEB /-E, that the concentrators
C1 and C2 are internally connected to.
Downlink is related to the VCs, that they can be assigned to the concentrators GFPs.
These VCs carrying ethernet frames through GFP encapsulation can be crossconnected via
the SDH network to the so called downlink port on other ethernet cards.

Basic functionality of the concentrators from downlink VCs to uplink port (upstream
direction):

Receiving ethernet frames on assigned VCs with GFP encapsulation

Determination of VLAN ID for received frame according to user defined table (Add VLAN
ID Assignment)

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

243

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Decapsulating ethernet frame (removal of GFP header)

Inserting of VLAN Tag in ethernet frame

Sending out tagged frame on gigabit uplink

Processing of up to 8 GFP groups

Processing of up to 8 subchannels per GFP group

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Basic functionality of the concentrators from uplink port to downlink VCs (downstream
direction):

Receiving of VLAN tagged frame on gigabit uplink port

CRC and VLAN tag present check

Determination of downlink VC - GFP channel for received tagged ethernet frame


according to user derfined table (Add VLAN ID Assignment)

Removal of VLAN tag

Removal of ETH frames with not determined VLAN tag

Encapsulating of ethernet frame into GFP frames

Mapping GFP encapsulated ethernet frame in assigned downlink VC

Note: On the downlink VC, only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned.


Regarding the Concatination Config for VLAN modes its therefore recommended to use
template 18 in case of VLAN C mode and template 19 or 20 in case of Mixed mode.

Tag interpretation in VLAN modes


VLAN Tag format accoding to 802.1q:
Type Field

Ethertype 0x8100 will be inserted in upstream direction and is expected for tagged
frames received on gigabit uplink port towards downstream

Priority Field

not interpreted in downstream direction (untagging)

set to zero in inserted VLAN tag in upstream direction (tagging)

CFI Field

not interpreted in downstream direction (untagging)

set to zero in inserted VLAN tag in upstream direction (tagging)

244

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

VLAN ID

1 ... 4094 freely configurable

Stacked VLANs or VLAN tunneling is supported, but there is no support for structured VLANs
(i.e. 4095x4095 VLAN IDs for interpreting two subsequent VLAN headers in one Frame).
Downstream VLAN tagged frames received on the gigabit uplink port which are shorter than
68 bytes (64 ... 67 Bytes including VLAN tag) will be extended to 64 byte length again after
the removal of the VLAN tag in the concentrator (padding). This extension is done by adding
a maximum of 4 bytes at the end of the frame before the FCS bytes.

Mutual influence of downstream speeds through flowcontrol on gigabit upstream port


Ports of IFQGBEB and IFQGBEB-E cards belonging to a VLAN concentrator domain do not
support admission control like IFQGBE and IFQGBE-E and the Point to Point (P2P) mode of
VLAN cards do. This means that an incoming VLAN stream on the gigabit uplink port
assigned to a downstream capacity of VC3 or VC3-2v cannot be limited by means of
admission control. Therefore care has to be taken at the device connected to the gigabit
upstream port, to not overrun the assigned downstream VCs. This goal can be reached
through limiting the data rate of such a stream on the router / server site according to the
assigned downstream VC capacity.

If a downstream VC is overrunned, two scenarios have to be considered:

Asymmetric Flow Control is enabled on the gigabit uplink port.


MAC control frames (Pause) will be send out on the gigabit port. Since pause frames
cannot be classified all the VLAN streams of the device connected to the gigabit uplink
port will be slowed down to the speed of the overrunned downstream VC.

Asymmetric Flow Control is disabled on the gigabit uplink port.


Frames in downstream direction will be discarded in case the assigned downstream VC
capacity is exceeded.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

245

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

23.2 VLAN C Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the VLAN C traffic flow and gives an overview of the assigned VCs to
GFP relation. Context menues of the ETH port (ETH Configuration), VLAN C IDs (Assigned
VLAN IDs Information), GFP groups (GFP Frames Performance) and assigned VCs (VC4
Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards) can be directly accessed from here. The dotted line
between GFP group and VC symbol indicates that for this GFP group no VC assignment has
yet been done. The GFP groups are fixed assigned to the VLAN concentrator -> no dotted
line. Each VLAN concentrator has a separate traffic flow window.

Note for VLAN operation:


The VLAN functionality only makes sense if more than one stream/VLAN are used. For these
point-to-multipoint applications QoS provided by an external (egress) traffic shaper at the
uplink port is mandatory. Therefore the L2 service multiplexer function requires external (i.e.
BRAS, Router) traffic shaping. This means it is absolutely MANDATORY that for the VLAN
concentrator application egress traffic shaping per VLAN including max. burst size is
implemented in the uplink device (i.e. a BRAS in case of the DSL-scenario). This will avoid
head-of-line blocking in case of multiple VLAN-streams sharing the common GbE interface.
If this is not done, then an overflow of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer as well as
the egress buffers of a receiving FE card may happen. By this packet loss will not be
avoidable (depending on the situation):

246

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE VLAN card is disabled and the
connected BRAS does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. The reasons
for this frame drop are FIFO overflows of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer
as well as the receiving FE card's egress buffer.

Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE card is enabled and the connected
BRAS does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. Here only overflows of
the receiving FE card's egress buffer may happen. Nevertheless the enabled flow
control has influence on all eight GbE VLAN ingress buffers (one buffer for each of the
possible 8 downlink ports): If for one VLAN queue the ingress buffer overflows, the
activated pause frame mechanism will stop all other queues as well (i.e. also the
incoming frames to be sent in other FIFOs).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

247

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

23.3 VLAN Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN
C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids... -> Add... -> Apply -> Close.
In the VLAN C #n Traffic Flow window select VLAN C #n -> Subview

This window shows all assigned VLAN IDs per VLAN concentrator. It gives access to the
VLAN communication alarm and copy function of the alarm setting onto other VLAN IDs.

248

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

23.4 VLAN C Mode GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply -> Close -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.

GFP-SDH Assignment
Note: First, the VC structure has to be generated by means of the templates in the
Concatenation Group Templates window.

On VLAN concentrators only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned. High order VCs (VC4 and
VC4-nv) can not be assigned to VLAN concentrators
Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption!
The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An
extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.
Note: Sink and source must have the same configuration, otherwise all frames will be
dropped.

On VLAN C mode GFP group #1- #8 are fixed assigned to VLAN Concentrator 1 on ETH
uplink port #1.
GFP group #9 - #16 are fixed assigned to VLAN Concentrator 2 on ETH uplink port #3.
On VLAN uplink port #1 (GFP group #1 - #8) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 1 - 16 can be
assigned.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

249

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

On VLAN uplink port #3 (GFP group #9 - #16) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 17 - 32 can
be assigned.

If subchannelling is enabled each GFP subchannel will be tagged in upstream direction with
its respective VLAN ID as configured in the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.

In VLAN C mode with 8 GFP groups per concentrator and a maximum of 8 VC subchannels
per GFP group, up to 64 (8x8) downlinkports can be assigned to one VLAN concentrator.
These downlinkports are VLAN tagged and multiplexed on the gigabit uplink port #1 or #3
(uplink direction). In the down link direction the same principle applies with untagging and
mapping frames on the max. 64 downstream VCs.

Note: In VLAN concentrator admission control (bandwidth limitation) can not be configured as
in IFQGBE /-E cards or P2P mode.
Therefore care has to be taken on the gigabit uplink (port #1 or #3) in downstream direction to
not overrun the downstream VC capacity or the speed of the downlink port on the other end of
the VC.

The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.
This alarm raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.

VLAN ID Assignment...
Opens the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.

VLAN C ETH Config...


Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.

GFP Group Subview...


Opens the GFP Group Subview window.

VC4 Subview...
Opens the VC4 Selection window.

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups


250

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

251

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

23.5 Mixed Mode GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State: Mixed -> Apply -> Close -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.

VLAN C-GFP Assignment


On VLAN mixed mode GFP group #9 - #16 are fixed assigned to VLAN concentrator 2 on
ETH uplink port #3.

ETH-GFP Assignment
Here ETH ports #1 and #2 running in standard point to point mode can be configured.
Assign ETH ports #1 and #2 to the GFP group #1 or #2 and enter the bandwidth for each
ETH port.
The value range is configurable : 1...1000 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

Note:
The sum of the bandwidths of all ports assigned to one GFP group must not exceed the
capacity of the assigned Virtual Container (VC).
Approx. values: VC3: 50 Mbit/s, VC3-2v: 100 Mbit/s, VC4: 155 Mbit/s, VC4-4v: 622 Mbit/s,
VC4-7v: 1000 Mbit/s.
All frames will be dropped, if the channel numbers of sink and source are different.

252

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

GFP-SDH Assignment
Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation
Group Templates window.
Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.
Assignment point to point mode GFP groups #1 and #2
On GFP Group #1 and #2 VCs of AU4 channels 1 - 16 can be assigned.
The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An
extension header is required if the GFP group contains both 2 point to point mode ports (ETH
#1 and #2).

Note: Sink and source must have the same configuration, otherwise all frames will be
dropped.

Assignment VLAN C2 - GFP Groups #9 - #16:


On VLAN concentrators only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned. High order VCs (VC4 & VC4nv) can not be assigned to VLAN concentrators.
On VLAN uplink port #3 (GFP group #9 - #16) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 17 - 32 can
be assigned.
The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An
extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.
If subchannelling is enabled each GFP subchannel will be tagged in upstream direction with
its respective VLAN ID as configured in the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.
In VLAN C Mode with 8 GFP groups per concentrator and a maximum of 8 VC subchannels
per GFP group, up to 64 (8x8) downlinkports can be assigned to one VLAN concentrator.
These downlinkports are VLAN tagged and multiplexed on the gigabit uplink port #3 (uplink
direction). In the down link direction the same principle applies with untagging and mapping
frames on the max. 64 downstream VCs.

Note: In VLAN concentrator admission control (bandwidth limitation) can not be configured as
in IFQGBE /-E cards or point to point mode.
Therefore care has to be taken on the gigabit uplink (port #3) in downstream direction to not
overrun the downstream VC capacity or the speed of the downlink port on the other end of the
VC.

Equal for all GFP Groups:


The supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.

Note:
If a received VC indicates to carry GFP framed traffic (signal label) and this is the expected
signal label (no PLM detected), but no packets can be delineated from this VC, a LofDel
alarm is raised.
This alarm also raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

253

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption (in all
VLAN & point to point GFPs)!

VLAN ID Assignment...
Opens the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.

VLAN C ETH Config...


Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.

ETH Config...
Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.

GFP Group Subview...


Opens the GFP Group Subview window.

VC4 Subview...
Opens the VC4 Selection window.

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups


How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel

254

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

23.6 Assigned VLAN IDs Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN
C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids...

This window displays information about assigned VLAN Ids. Each VLAN concentrator has a
separate window, showing the assigned IDs.

The Add... button opens the Add VLAN ID Assignment window, to assign new VLAN IDs.
With the Delete button, a selected VLAN ID from the list can be deleted.

Note: Deleting a VLAN ID stops traffic in UP- and downstream direction through the
concentrator for the before assigned GFP channel.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

255

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

23.7 Add VLAN ID Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN
C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids... -> Add...

In this window, make the necessary VLAN assignment settings.


Each VLAN concentrator has a separate window for VLAN ID assignments.
With the VLAN ID assignment the correlation between the VLAN tagged streams on the
gigabit uplink port and the VC downstream channels is done.
First choose the GFP group and GFP channel in that your signal is running and then set the
desired VLAN ID for that stream.
If subchanneling is enabled for the respective GFP group (in GFP Assignment window) GFP
channel 0...7 are available to assign to a VLAN ID.
In case subchanneling was disabled (in GFP Assignment window) the GFP channel line is
grayed out. (The dim visable `0 is a default that can be ignored.)
Once a VLAN ID has been assigned to a GFP group/channel without subchanneling this
group will no longer be available in the GFP group line for selection.
VLAN IDs can be assigned to a GFP group/channel without having assigned a VC3 or VC32v to that group before.
With the VLAN ID assignment the correlation between the VLAN tagged streams on the
gigabit uplink port and the VC downstream channels is done.
VLAN IDs can be freely selected in the area of 1...4094.
VLAN ID 0 and 4095 are reserved as stated in 802.1Q and can therefore not be assigned.

VLAN Functionality

256

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

24 Virtual VCs
24.1 Virtual 2x AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G symbol with VC4-nv concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview... -> VC4-2v #n -> Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

257

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

24.2 Virtual VC12 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card
symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux
Preparation.
Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... ->
Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.
258

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv ->
Subview... -> Virtual VC12 #n -> Configuration...

Virtual VC12 Misc tab:


Supervision
Supervision of the VC12 signals is active, if checkbox is set.
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects of the
IFOFES-E cards.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...2000]
The entry shows how many received blocks per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (BIP2).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
Signal Label: (only IFOFES-E cards)
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.

Virtual VC12 Trail Trace tab:


The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (only IFOFES-E cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.
There are two modes:

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

259

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Enabled:

Disabled:

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.

TIM Consequent Actions


For SF2G5/SF10G cards:
Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

For IFOFES-E cards:


Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of remote.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
st
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1 byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isnt continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

260

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

24.3 Virtual VC3 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5
symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC3-2v > Subview... -> Virtual VC3 #n -> Configuration...

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

261

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Virtual VC3 Misc tab:


Supervision
Supervision of the VC3 signals is active, if checkbox is set.
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects of ETH
cards.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1.. 8000]
The entry shows how many received blocks per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2..10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
Signal Label: (only at vcTtp objects of ETH cards)
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.

Virtual VC3 Trail Trace tab:


The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of vcTtp objects of ETH cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal..
There are two modes:
Enabled:

Disabled:

262

received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an
ASCII text.
received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

TIM Consequent Actions


For SF2G5/SF10G cards:
Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

For ETH cards:


Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of remote.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
st
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1 byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isnt continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

Virtual VC4 Configuration

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

263

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

24.4 Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFQ622M card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> Concatenation
Type = VC4-4v... -> Apply.
Return to the Port List symbol -> Subview... -> 4x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4-4v ->
Subview -> Virtual AU4/VC4 #n -> Configuration...

Virtual VC4 Misc tab:


Supervision (if available)
Supervision of the VC4 signals is active, if checkbox is set.
RDI/REI Insertion (if available)
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]
The entry shows how many received blocks per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
264

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Signal Label: (only at vcTtp objects of ETH cards)


Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC4 signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected signal label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.

Virtual VC4 Trail Trace tab:


The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of vcTtp objects of ETH cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.
There are two modes:
Enabled:

Disabled:

received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an
ASCII text.
received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.

TIM Consequent Actions


For SDH cards:
Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

For ETH cards:


Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of remote.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

265

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
st
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1 byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isnt continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

Virtual VC3 Configuration

266

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

25 GFP Configurations
25.1 GFP Group Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an PF2G5 symbol in the port list -> Subview...

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

267

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

This window shows the GFP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.

Note:
Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify
coherences.

How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic

268

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

25.2 GFP Group Subview

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an Ethernet card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Group Subview...

This window shows the GFP groups and gives access to their context menus.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

269

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

25.3 GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBE-E card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...

Note:
If a received VC indicates to carry GFP framed traffic (signal label) and this is the expected
signal label (no PLM detected), but no packets can be delineated from this VC, a LofDel
alarm is raised.

ETH-GFP Assignment
Through this table, an Ethernet port is assigned to a GFP group which can consist of one or
more GFP channels. Subchanneling is implemented if several Ethernetports are assigned to
a single GFP group.
Assign ETH ports to the GFP groups (if provided) and enter the Bandwidth for each ETH port.
The value range depends on the port type:
Fast Ethernet 10Base-TX:

1...10 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

Fast Ethernet 100Base-TX:

1...100 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

Gigabit Ethernet 1000Base-SX/LX:

1...1000 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

Notes:
The IFOFES-E card does not support admission control (bandwidth limitation). This can be
done by adding or removing VC12 containers of a virtual concatenation group (2 Mbit/s
granularity).
The sum of the bandwidths of all ports assigned to one GFP group must not exceed the
capacity of the assigned Virtual Container (VC).
Approx. values: VC3: 50 Mbit/s, VC3-2v: 100 Mbit/s, VC4: 155 Mbit/s, VC4-4v: 622 Mbit/s,
VC4-7v: 1000 Mbit/s.
All frames will be dropped, if the channel numbers of sink and source are different.

270

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

GFP-SDH Assignment
Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation
Group Templates window.
Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.
Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption!
The Subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An
extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.
The IFOFES-E card does not support subchanneling (extension header). Therefore the user
must pay attention that the incoming VC/VC group does not have an extension header,
otherwise all ETH frames will be dropped.
Note: Sink and source must have the same configuration, otherwise all frames will be
dropped.
The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.
This alarm is raised if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.

ETH Config...
Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.

GFP Group Subview...


Opens the GFP Group Subview window.

VC4 Subview...
Opens the VC4 Selection window.

PF2G5 GFP Assignment


How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups
How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

271

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

25.4 PF2G5 GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...

LP Bandwidth Configuration
Enter the Ingress Bandwidth and Egress Bandwidth for each LP port.
Value range: 1...450 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

GFP-SDH Assignment
Assign the VC or VC group to each GFP group and enable/disable supervision.

RPR-SDH Assignment
Select Quad or Single SDH Capacity and assign the VC or VC group to the RPR and
enable/disable supervision.

Port Config...
Opens the PF2G5 Config window, after selecting a port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration
table.
GFP Group Subview...
Opens the GFP Group Selection window.

272

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

VC4 Subview...
Opens the VC4 Selection window.

How to Create / Delete VC Channels


How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups
How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel
How to Configure RPR Bandwidths
How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG
How to Specify the CUG Service Class

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

273

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

25.5 PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select a port in the LP Bandwidth
Configuration table) -> Port Config... (select Single CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG
Management

CUG ID [0..4095]
Select the CUG ID.
Service Class
Select the Service Class.
Ingress Stream Bandwidth [1..450]
Select the Ingress Stream Bandwidth.
Egress Stream Bandwidth [1..450]
Select the Egress Stream Bandwidth.
Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth [1..450]
Select the Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth.
VLAN Mode
Select the VLAN mode.

274

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG


How to Specify the CUG Service Class

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

275

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

25.6 PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth
Configuration) -> Port Config... (select Multi1 CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG Management

The table allows to enter the Multi1 CUG configuration settings according to the network
planning.

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG


How to Specify the CUG Service Class

276

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

25.7 PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth
Configuration) -> Port Config... (select Multi2 CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG Management

Tunnel Tag Prot ID


Enter the Tunnel Tag Prot ID

The table allows to enter the Multi2 CUG configuration settings according to the network
planning.

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG


How to Specify the CUG Service Class

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

277

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

25.8 PF2G5 Add CUG

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth
Configuration table) -> Port Config... (select Multi2 CUG Mode, move at least 1 entry from the
"Possible CUG ID values" list to the "CUG ID list") -> Apply -> CUG Management -> Add
CUG

CUG ID [1..4095]
Select the CUG ID.
Tunneling Mode
Activate / Deactivate the tunneling mode.
Service Class
Select the Select Class.
Ingress Stream Bandwidth [1..450 Mbps]
Select the Ingress Stream Bandwidth.
Egress Stream Bandwidth [1..450 Mbps]
Select the Egress Stream Bandwidth.
Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth [1..450 Mbps]
Select the Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth.

278

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration


PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration
PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration
How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

279

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

25.9 SDH GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections -> Plain List...
(e.g. using a cross connection of an IFOFGE-E card, by selecting an entry in the list) -> GFP
Assignment...

GFP-SDH Assignment
Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation
Group Templates window.
Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.
Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption!
The VC/VC Group column allows to select a VC.
The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.
This alarm raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.

ETH Config...
Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.

GFP Group Subview...


Opens the GFP Group Subview window.

280

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

VC4 Subview...
Opens the VC4 Selection window.

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

281

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

26 LCAS
26.1 LCAS State Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Configuration -> LCAS State...

This window shows the LCAS state of all LCAS virtual groups in the network element. With
filters, the operator can select special groups.

Filter:
The Termination Point list can be filtered by setting filter options.

Selected Item:
Sink
Displays the sink state.
Source
Displays the source state.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

283

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

LCAS Source Direction State


Allows to set the LCAS source direction state.

Note:
One member of a LCAS group could have three states:
idle = The LCAS protocol is not activated
active = the LCAS protocol is activated
failed = failure in the signal

284

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

26.2 Modify LCAS Concatenation Group

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFOFES-E card with VC3 or VC12 LCAS concatenation -> Configuration -> Concatenation
(with an entry in the list selected) -> Modify LCAS...

This window allows to select the number of members in the concatenation and to select the
associated TPs from the list of available TPs.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

285

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

26.3 LCAS VC3-nv Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x
VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Configuration...

LCAS VC3-1v Misc:


Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
Concatenation Type
Displays the concatenation type.
Configured LCAS Group Capacity/Mbps
Displays the Configured LCAS Group Capacity.
LCAS: Partial Loss Threshold
Allows to set separate thresholds in case of partial loss of received / transmitted capacity.
Partial Loss of Capacity: You can allow a minimum capacity (Mbit/s) by configuration, which
an LCAS group can have. If there is a VC3-2v (2x 48 Mbit = 96 Mbit) and the threshold is set
to 90, then an alarm rises, when 1 VC3 is turned out.

286

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

26.4 LCAS VC12-nv Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux)
#n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate
the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in the upper part of the Module View -> Configuration ->
Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... > VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Configuration -> TP...

LCAS VC12-1v Misc:


Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision for this LCAS group alarms. This supervision has no
influence to the alarms of the included VCs.
Concatenation Type
Displays the concatenation type.
Configured LCAS Group Capacity/Mbps
Displays the Configured LCAS Group Capacity.
LCAS: Partial Loss Threshold
Allows to set separate thresholds in case of partial loss of received / transmitted capacity.
Partial Loss of Capacity: You can allow a minimum capacity (Mbit/s) by configuration, which
an LCAS group can have. If there is a VC12-5v (5x 2.1 Mbit = 10.5 Mbit) and the threshold is
set to 7, then an alarm rises, when 2 VC12 are turned out.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

287

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

26.5 LCAS VC3-nv Virtual VC3 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x
VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Subview...

This window shows the LCAS Virtual VC3 traffic flow symbol(s) and gives access to the
context menu(s).

288

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

26.6 LCAS VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux)
#n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate
the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in tne upper part of the Module View -> Configuration ->
Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... > VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Subview ...

This window shows the LCAS Virtual VC12 traffic flow symbol(s) and gives access to the
context menu(s).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

289

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

26.7 LCAS Virtual VC3 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x
VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Subview... ->
LCAS Virtual VC3 #n -> Configuration...

LCAS VC3 Misc tab:


Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]
The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

290

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of
Errored Blocks (B3).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
Signal Label:
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.
LCAS State:
Sink
Displays the sink state.
Source
Displays the source state.
LCAS Source Direction State
Allows to set the LCAS source direction state.

LCAS VC3 Trail Trace tab:


The LCAS Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three
types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
There are two modes:
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.
TIM Consequent Actions
Enabled:
TIM will switch off this VC, the VC group capacity will be reduced by this VC.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

291

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

TIM will cause RDI insertion.


There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.

Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

292

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

26.8 LCAS Virtual VC12 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux)
#n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate
the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in tne upper part of the Module View -> Configuration ->
Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... > VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Subview ... -> LCAS Virtual VC12 #n ->
Configuration...

LCAS VC12 Misc tab:


Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision of this VC.
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...2000]
The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

293

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of
Errored Blocks (BIP2).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).
Signal Label:
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
For GFP mapping, the signal label = 13.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.
LCAS State:
Sink
Displays the sink state, i.e. the state of the incoming single VC.
Source
Displays the source state, i.e. the state of the outgoing single VC, as received by the remote
station.
Note: In order to have LCAS traffic, at least one of the source members must be set to
"Active".
LCAS Source Direction State
Allows to set the LCAS source direction state.
To increase the group capacity, this VC can be added by setting it to Active. This increases
the capacity in outgoing direction.

Note:
One member of a LCAS group could have three states:
idle = the LCAS protocol is not activated
active = the LCAS protocol is activated
failed = failure in the VC12

LCAS VC12 Trail Trace tab:


The LCAS Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three
types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.

294

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

TTI Processing
There are two modes:
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.
TIM Consequent Actions
Enabled:
TIM will cause an interruption of this single VC and will reduce the group capacity.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic or reduce the group capacity.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.

Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

295

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

27 MCF General
27.1 Message Communication Functions

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF...

This window contains functional symbols representing the different layers for message
communication. The symbols are used to select the components of the MCF.

Context Menu:
In the View, right-click the symbol to open the respective context menu.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

297

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

27.2 MCF Stack Parameters Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Stack Parameters -> Configuration...

Notes:
When stack parameters are changed, the stack restarts. Connection to NE has to be
reestablished.

Layer 4 (Transport):
Window Timer [5..1009]/10s
The Window timer specifies the maximum time between windows updates used for this
connection. The window timer therefore is used to send AK TPDU when there is no activity on
the transport connection, in order to avoid a premature disconnection by the peer entity. This
parameter also controls the inactivity timer. If no acknowledgement PDUs from the opposite
station are received for a time computed as the product of the Window Timer and the
Maximum No. of Transmissions, Layer 4 quits the connection.
Maximum No. of Transmissions [3..16]
Displays the time after the data packet is repeated if there was no acknowledgement for this
packet from the opposite station.
Retransmission Time [250..64000 ms]
298

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Specifies the time after the data packet is repeated if no acknowledgement for this packet by
the opposite station was received.

Layer 3 (NSAP):
Area Address
The address range forms part of the NSAP address (area, system ID, and selector) and is
mainly defined by the first byte of the NSAP address. That first byte, called AFI, defines the
length and the byte rate from all three parts. The NSAP address has to be fixed by the DCN
planning.
Note:
The NSAP address has to be unique.
System ID
The System ID is 6 Bytes long.
Note:
The System ID as part of the NSAP address has to be planned by the DCN planning team.
NSAP Selector [1.255]
The NSAP Selector is a part of the own NSAP address.
Note:
The NSAP selector has to be "01"!

Layer 3 (CLNS):
CLNS Maximum Lifetime [2..255]
Displays the maximum lifetime of a CLNS PDU in steps of 0.5 seconds. If a CLNS PDU is
forwarded by an intermediate system, the lifetime of this PDU is always decremented by at
least 0.5 seconds.
Routing Principle
Displays if a system belongs to the OSI routing backbone (L2) or to an single OSI area only
(L1).
Note:
The configuration is only accessible to user level 4. A change of configuration could be
followed by a loss of connection.

How to Configure NSAP Settings

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

299

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

27.3 MCF Transport Connection Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport Connections n -> Information...

In this window, the performance information of a connection to a remote NE is displayed.

Remote NSAP Address


Displays the NSAP Address of the connected LCT/NCT/OS.
Remote T Selector
T Selector used by the remote manager for this transport connection.
Local T Selector
T Selector used by this NE for this transport connection.
Connection Type
Direction of the transport connection setup. (Outgoing = sent from the local system, Incoming
= sent from the remote system).
Window Timer [5..1009]/10s
The Window timer specifies the maximum time between windows updates used for this
connection. The window timer therefore is used to send AK TPDU when there is no activity on
the transport connection, in order to avoid a premature disconnection by the peer entity. This
parameter also controls the inactivity timer. If no acknowledgement PDUs from the opposite
station are received for a time computed as the product of the Window Timer and the
Maximum No. of Transmissions, Layer 4 quits the connection.
300

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Maximum No. of Transmissions [3..16]


Displays, how often a data packet (Acknowledge) has to be repeated.
Retransmission Time [250..64000 ms]
Displays the time after the data packet is repeated if there was no acknowledgement from the
opposite station.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

301

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

27.4 MCF Transport Connection Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport Connections n -> Performance...

This window displays how many bytes were received and sent and how many Packet Data
Units (PDUs) where received, sent and repeated.

302

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

28 MCF CLNS
28.1 MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> CLNS -> Information...

This window displays information for network configuration for the local NE.

Destination Areas
Address Prefix
displays the address part of the destination area.
Path Cost
displays the cost summary from this area to the destination area.
Adjacency Reference List Number
contains the adjacency IDs usable for reaching the destination area.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

303

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Destination Systems
NSAP Address
displays the NSAP of the destination system.
Path Cost
displays the cost summary from this area to the destination area.
Adjacency Reference List Number
contains the adjacency IDs usable for reaching the destination area.

Adjacencies
displays all adjacencies to neighbours via Ethernet or DCC.
Linkage ID (only in case of a DCC adjacency)
displays the internal ID number of the linkage.
Adjacency ID
displays the internal ID number of the adjacency.
Neighbour SNPA (only in case of an Ethernet adjacency)
displays the MAC address of the neighbour.
Neighbour System Type
displays the Level 2 or Level 1 system type.
Neighbour System IDs
Displays the System IDs of the neighbour.

304

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

28.2 MCF CLNS Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> CLNS -> Performance...

This window is used for displaying MCF CLNS performance information.

The counter values are displayed as: ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd (d means digit) to improve the
readability.

IS-IS Level 1 Data Base Overload


Displays the overload state of this linkage for level 1 routing.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

305

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Display

Meaning

Raised

The level 1 routing data base is overloaded; the routing through this system is
disturbed.

Cleared

No overload

IS-IS Level 2 Data Base Overload


Displays the overload state of this linkage for level 2 routing.

Display

Meaning

Raised

The level 2 routing data base is overloaded; the routing through this system is
disturbed.

Cleared

No overload

Assembling Segments Discarded


Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered due to
reassembly time expiry.

Congestion Discards
Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded due to congestion.

Error Reports Received


Displays the number of error report PDUs received, which were addressed to this NE.

Area Addresses Ignored


Displays the number of the manual area addresses dropped from the NEs area, because the
maximum number of area addresses inside the NE is reached.

Octets Received
Displays the total number of received user data octets.

Octets Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data octets.

306

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Other PDUs Discarded


Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded for any reason except
congestion.

Segments Discarded
Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered for
any reason except reassembly time expiry.

Segments Received
Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs received.

Segments Sent
Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs sent after segmentation processing
occurs.

Upload Dump DB...


Opens a standard Save window to store data base parameters in the DumpDB.log file.

Upload Config Parameters...


Opens a standard Save window to store configuration parameters in the
ConfigParameters.log file.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

307

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

29 MCF DCC
29.1 MCF DCC Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration...

In this window, you can create various connections between DCC channels and the VC-4
ports.

DCC List
The list contains 5 DCC channels and displays its connection state.

Display

Meaning

OSI DCC Channel

OSI DCC channel name

IP DCC Device

IP DCC channel name

DCCM/DCCR Port

<DCCM or DCCR type>_<slot number>.<port>

Connection State

Possible values: DCCM; DCCR; free

Linkage State

Possible values: Enabled / Disabled

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

309

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

New DCC Cross Connection


Set the type of DCC cross connection and select the MS/RS port from the Port List.

How to Configure DCC Cross Connections


Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections

310

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

29.2 MCF DCC Linkage Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context
menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration...

Reachable Addresses
Fixed routes to other routing domains, called Reachable Address Prefixes, can be created
and deleted here.

Configuration:
Traffic Mode
Select the traffic mode according to the planning data.
External Domain
Possible settings: Yes or No
yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. In this case the creation of RAPs thru this linkage is
strongly recommended; otherwise this linkage will not be used for communication to other
NEs.
no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default).
Level 1 Default Metric [1..63]
Cost for DCC channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of
all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

311

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Default = 1
Level 2 Default Metric [1..63]
Cost for DCC channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of
all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default = 1
T200 Time [200...2500 ms]
Value range: 200...2500 ms
Interface Type
Setting the interface for the local and remote NE. For a successful connection, the one NE
must be set on Network and the other one to User.
Line Code
Displays the NRZ line code.
MCF Linkage State
Displays, whether the connection can be used (enabled) or not (disabled).

Note:
In Active NE state, it may be necessary to click Apply after every single parameter change.

The Add... button opens the DCC Reachable Address Add window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the DCC Reachable Address
Modify window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Delete button removes the selected entry from the list.

312

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

29.3 MCF DCC Linkage Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context
menu of a channel in the list) -> Performance...

Reject Adjacency
It is registered, if the information of an NE cannot be received because of an inadequate
memory capacity in the adjacent range.
Version Skew
If an adjacency cannot be initialized because of incompatible protocol versions, the value of
this version skew is increased.
ID Field Length Mismatch
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID
Field Length Mismatch is increased.
Max. Area Address Mismatch
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max.
Area Address Mismatch is increased.
Area Mismatch
If an adjacency cannot be initialized between two Level 1 ISs because of non-divisibility of a
common range address, the value of this Area Mismatch is increased.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

313

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Octets Received
Displays the total number of received user data octets.
Octets Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data octets.
Frames Received
Displays the total number of received user data frames.
Frames Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data frames.

314

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

29.4 Adding a Reachable DCC Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context
menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Add...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration
Address Prefix
The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another
routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this DCC linkage" (Hint: a DCC linkage never has a SNPA!)
- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed.
- Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of
another one.
Default Metric [1..63]
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default Metric Type
Possible values: Internal or External
The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type
Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address
prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.
If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be
one.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

315

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).

316

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

29.5 Modifying a Reachable DCC Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context
menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Modify...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration:
Address Prefix
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this DCC linkage. In the modify window, this is in a read only mode."
(Hint: a DCC linkage never has a SNPA!)
Default Metric [1..63]
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the
highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default Metric Type
Possible values: Internal or External
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

317

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

29.6 Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections

MSOH CPs in each Termination Point:

DCCM [combined CP for bytes (6,1,1), (6,4,1), (6,7,1), (7,1,1), (7,4,1), (7,7,1), (8,1,1), (8,4,1)
and (8,7,1)]
HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (5,5,1), (5,6,1) and (5,8,1)]
HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (7,5,1), (7,6,1) and (7,8,1)]
HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (7,9,1), (8,2,1) and (8,3,1)]
HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (8,5,1), (8,6,1) and (8,8,1)]
HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (8,9,1), (9,8,1) and (9,9,1)]
HCOC9 [combined CP for bytes (5,9,1), (6,2,1), (6,3,1), (6,5,1), (6,6,1), (6,8,1), (6,9,1), (7,2,1)
and (7,3,1)]
HCOC9 [combined CP for bytes (7,9,1), (8,2,1), (8,3,1), (8,5,1), (8,6,1), (8,8,1), (8,9,1), (9,8,1)
and (9,9,1)]
HCOC27 [combined CP for bytes (5,5,1), (5,6,1), (5,8,1), (5,9,1), (6,2,1), (6,3,1), (6,5,1),
(6,6,1), (6,8,1), (6,9,1),(7,2,1), (7,3,1), (7,5,1), (7,6,1), (7,8,1), (7,9,1), (8,2,1), (8,3,1), (8,5,1),
(8,6,1), (8,8,1), (8,9,1), (9,2,1), (9,3,1), (9,4,1), (9,8,1) and (9,9,1)]

MCF DCC Configuration

318

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

30 MCF Ethernet
30.1 MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration...

Reachable Addresses
Address Prefix
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator.
SNPA Address
SNPA address of the reachable address entry (SNPA = MAC address).
Click Delete to clear existing addresses.

Configuration:
Traffic Mode
Select the traffic mode according to the planning data.
External Domain
Possible settings: No or Yes
yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. In this case the creation of RAPs thru this linkage is
strongly recommended; otherwise this linkage will not be used for communication to other
NEs.
no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default)."
L1/L2 Intermediate System Priority [1...127]
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

319

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Priority of the system for being selected as the designated IS on the sub network.
Level 1 Default Metric [1--63]
Cost for Ethernet channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the
metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default = 1
Level 2 Default Metric [1..63]
Cost for Ethernet channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the
metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default = 1
MAC Ethernet Address
Displays the MAC address used by the NE for this Ethernet linkage". (Hint: the MAC address
is not configurable in the hiT70xx system).
MCF Linkage State
Linkage state is displayed.

The Add... button opens the Ethernet Reachable Address Add window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the Ethernet Reachable
Address Modify window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Delete button removes the selected entry from the list.

320

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

30.2 MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Performance...

Reject Adjacency
It is registered, if the information of an NE cannot be received because of an inadequate
memory capacity in the adjacent range.
Version Skew
If an adjacency cannot be initialized because of incompatible protocol versions, the value of
this version skew is increased.
ID Field Length Mismatch
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID
Field Length Mismatch is increased.
Max. Area Addresses Mismatch
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max.
Area Address Mismatch is increased.
Octets Received
Displays the total number of received user data octets.
Octets Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data octets.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

321

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Frames Received
Displays the total number of received user data frames.
Frames Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data frames.

322

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

30.3 Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration... (by using the
context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Add...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration:
Address Prefix
The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another
routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator.
- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed.
- Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of
another one.
Default Metric [1..63]
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default Metric Type
Possible values: Internal or External
The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type
Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address
prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

323

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be
one.
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).
SNPA Address
SNPA address of the reachable address entry.

324

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

30.4 Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration... (by using the
context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Modify...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration:
Address Prefix
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator. In
the modify window, this is in a read only mode.
Default Metric [1..63]
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the
highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default Metric Type
Possible values: Internal or External
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).
SNPA Address
SNPA address of the reachable address entry. In the modify window, this is in a read only
mode.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

325

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

31 MCF OSI/IP
31.1 MCF IP over OSI Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / IP over OSI -> Configuration...

This window contains a checkbox for activating the tunneling and displays the Remote Tunnel
NSAP and the Assigned IP Pseudo Interface.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

327

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

31.2 MCF OSI over IP Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration...

Reachable Addresses
Address Prefix
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage" (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a
SNPA!)
Configuration:
Activate Tunnel
Setting the checkbox for tunnel activation.
External Domain
Possible settings: No or Yes
yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. In this case the creation of RAPs thru this linkage is
strongly recommended; otherwise this linkage will not be used for communication to other
NEs.
no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default)."

Level 1 Default Metric [1--63]


Cost for channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all
paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
328

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Default = 1
Level 2 Default Metric [1..63]
Cost for channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all
paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default = 1
Source IP Address
This address has to be fixed by the planning personnel.
Destination IP Address
This address has to be fixed by the planning personnel.
MCF Linkage State
Linkage state is displayed.

The Add... button opens the MCF OSI over IP Reachable Address Add window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the MCF OSI over IP
Reachable Address Modify window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Delete button removes the selected entry from the list.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

329

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

31.3 MCF OSI over IP Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Performance...

Reject Adjacency
It is registered, if the information of an NE cannot be received because of an inadequate
memory capacity in the adjacent range.
Version Skew
If an adjacency cannot be initialized because of incompatible protocol versions, the value of
this version skew is increased.
ID Field Length Mismatch
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID
Field Length Mismatch is increased.
Max. Area Address Mismatch
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max.
Area Address Mismatch is increased.
Octets Received
Displays the total number of received user data octets.
Octets Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data octets.

330

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Frames Received
Displays the total number of received user data frames.
Frames Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data frames.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

331

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

31.4 MCF OSI over IP, Adding a Reachable Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration... ->
Add...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration
Address Prefix
The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another
routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage" (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a
SNPA!)
- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed.
- Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of
another one.
Default Metric [1..63]
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default Metric Type
Possible values: Internal or External
The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type
Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address
prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.

332

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be
one.
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

333

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

31.5 MCF OSI over IP, Modifying a Reachable Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration... ->
(with an entry selected in the Reachable Addresses list) -> Modify...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration:
Address Prefix
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage. In the modify window, this is in a read only
mode." (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a SNPA!)
Default Metric [1..63]
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the
highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default Metric Type
Possible values: Internal or External
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).

334

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

32 IP Settings
32.1 IP Addresses Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP Addresses...

This window allows to configure the IP addresses for each DCN interface within the
SURPASS hiT 7070.

Column

Description

Index

Unique identifier of the interface.


This index must be used also for identification
of unnumbered links in OSPF configuration.
(Identifier = SNMP-index)

Interface

Interface name.
Possible Interface names are :
eth0:
for Ethernet Interface
(unnumbered index 2)

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

335

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

lo:0:
for Local loopback interface
(unnumbered index 1)
dcc:
Point-to-point interface over DCCM or DCCR.
Each device could be configured as
numbered or unnumbered interface
IP Address

The local IP address of the interface.


The default value for the interface is 0.0.0.0 in
this case the interface is not configured.
Once a local loopback address has been
defined in the SURPASS hiT 7070, it is not
possible any more to reset a configured IP
address back to 0.0.0.0. If the address 0.0.0.0
is assigned, the NE assigns the address of
lo:0 to this device. If the IP address of an
interface is equal to the address of the local
loopback interface lo:0 this interface is treated
as unnumbered interface. If the IP address is
not equal to the address of lo:0 or to the
address of any other interface this interface is
called a numbered interface. Every time that
the operator tries to disable an IP interface by
configuring its IP address to 0.0.0.0, the local
loopback IP address will be set.
+ to disable IP on the interface set this
interface to OSI only, using the "Linkage
Config" window.
For Ethernet interface: SCOH symbol ->
Configuration -> MCF -> Ethernet ->
Configuration, then select OSI.
For DCC interfaces: SCOH symbol ->
Configuration -> MCF -> DCC, then select a
DCC interface and press the right-handmouse button, select "Configuration", then
select OSI.

Subnet Mask

Subnet mask associated with the IP address


of this interface.
It defines the network that this interface
belongs to. If OSPF is enabled on this
interface the subnet mask has to be the same
as set for the connected peer interface(s).

Dest IP Address

The destination IP address of the interface


referenced by the Index.
For the Ethernet interface the destination has
to be the same as the source. For DCC links
normally it is not necessary to enter any data
in this field. The destination address will be
learned via PPP protocol.

336

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Modify...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the IP Addresses Entry Modify window.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

337

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

32.2 IP Addresses Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP Addresses... -> Modify...

This window allows to modify a selected entry in the IP Addresses Config table.

338

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

32.3 IP Static Routing Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing...

This window shows all the IP routes known by the SURPASS hiT 7070 and also allows to
configure static routes manually.
Each known route has one entry (row) in the table. For each known route the following
information is shown:

Column

Description

Destination

Destination IP address of this route.


Warning: The networks 192.168.0.0 to
192.168.255.255 are reserved for internal
purposes and should never be entered in this
table.

Interface

Name of the local interface through which the


next hop of this route should be reached.

Metric [0..32766]

Primary routing metric for this route.

Next Hop

IP address of the next hop of this route.

Type

Type of the route:


Direct

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

339

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The destination IP address is directly


connected to the SURPASS hiT 7070 via the
interface named in the "interface" column.
Indirect
The destination IP address is reachable via
the Next Hop IP address.
Invalid
removes the route from the active routing
process.
Protocol

Routing mechanism via which this route was


learned.

Mask

Mask to be logically AND-ed with the


destination address, before being compared
to the value in the Destination field.

Add...
Opens the IP Static Routing Entry Add window.
Modify...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the IP Static Routing Entry Modify
window.
Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.
On deletion, the route will be first set to "Invalid" type.

340

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

32.4 IP Static Routing Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing... -> Add...

This window allows to add a new entry to the IP Static Routing Config table.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

341

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

32.5 IP Static Routing Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing... -> Modify...

This window allows to modify an existing entry in the IP Static Routing Config table.

342

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

33 OSPF Settings
33.1 OSPF Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> OSPF...

This window allows to configure the OSPF routing in the SURPASS hiT 7070 (called "router"
from now on).

OSPF Router ID
Identifier of the router (SURPASS hiT 7070) in the Autonomous System. The initial value is
the IP Ethernet interface address of the router.

Enabled OSPF
The value Enabled (ticked on) means that OSPF is active. The value Disabled means that
OSPF is inactive on all interfaces.
Note: Clicking Enabled OSPF returns "enabled" only if the OSPF Router ID is set and if at
least one interface is configured with an area. In all other cases, "disabled" will be returned.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

343

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Autonomous System Border Router


Indication whether this router is an Autonomous System border router (ASBR). ASBRs
propagate default routes only when these are entered.

Area Border Router


Indication whether this router is an area border router.

Information Fields:

External Link State Advertisements


Displays the number of external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements, which are currently
stored in the link-state database.

Originated New Link State Advertisements


Displays the number of new link-state advertisements that have been originated by this
router.

Received New Link State Advertisements


Displays the number of link-state advertisements received, determined to be new
instantiations.

External LSA Checksum Summary


Displays the sum of the LSA checksums of the external link-state advertisements contained in
the link-state database.

344

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.2 OSPF Areas Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Areas handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070
("router"). For each area handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070 there is a row in this table.

Column

Description

Area

Unique identifier of an area.

LSA Import

Import mode selection for LSAs (Link State


Advertisements). Used to configure stub
areas.

SPF Runs

The number of times that the intra-area route


table has been calculated using this area's
link state database.

Link State
Advertisement (LSA)

This is an information field: displays the


number of Link State Advertisements.

LSA Checksum
Summary

This is an information field: displays the sum


of the LSA link-state checksums contained in
the link-state database of this area.

Area Summary

Control of the import of summary LSAs into


stub areas.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

345

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Modify...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Areas Entry Modify window.

Note:
No entries can be added to this table, it is built by the SURPASS hiT 7070 based on the
OSPF areas known.

346

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.3 OSPF Areas Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas... ->
Modify...

This window allows to modify an existing entry in the OSPF Areas Config table.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

347

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.4 OSPF Area Metric Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area Metric...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Area Metric.

348

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.5 OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area
Aggregates...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Area Aggregates.


Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration window is
the OSPF Configuration .

Column

Description

Area

Area in which the Area Aggregate is to be


found.

LSDB Type

Type of the Area Aggregate.

Net Address

The IP address of the network or sub-network


indicated by the range.

Net Mask

The sub-network mask that pertains to the


network or sub-network.

Effect

Sub-networks subsumed by ranges


either trigger the advertisement of the
indicated aggregate (advertise matching),
or result in the sub-network not being

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

349

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

advertised at all outside the area.

Add...
Opens the OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add window.
Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.

Note:
Configuration may cause a reboot on other SURPASS hiT 7070 / 7050 in the network.

350

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.6 OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area
Aggregates... -> Add..

This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration table.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

351

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.7 OSPF Interfaces Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces...

This window allows to configure the OSPF interfaces.


Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Interfaces Configuration window is the
OSPF Configuration

Column

Description

Index

Unique identifier of this interface.


This is the index defined in the IP Address
Table.

IP Address

IP address of this interface.

State

OSPF interface state: possible types are


For Ethernet Interface:
Designated Router,
Backup Designated Router
Other Designated Router
For DCC Interfaces,
Point to Point (PtP)

Events

352

Number of times this OSPF interface has


changed its state, or an error has occurred.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Administrative State

Status of OSPF for this interface (Enabled /


Disabled).

Area

Unique identifier of the area to which the


interface connects.

Type

OSPF interface type:

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Broadcast (Ethernet interfaces).


Point-to-Point (DCC interfaces)
The Loopback interface reads "unknown" in
this table.
Designated Router

IP address of the designated router in the


LAN, if applicable.

Backup Designated
Router

IP address of the backup designated router in


the LAN, if applicable.

Router Priority [0..255]

Priority of this interface for becoming


Designated Router.
Prio = "0" means excluded from becoming
Designated Router.

Transit Delay [0..3600


s]

Estimated number of seconds to transmit a


link-state update packet over this interface.

Retransmission Interval Number of seconds between link-state


[0..3600 s]
advertisement retransmissions, for
adjacencies belonging to this interface.
Hello Interval [1..65535
s]

Number of seconds between the Hello


packets that the router sends on the interface.

Timeout [1..65535 s]

Timeout interval.

Password Type

Type of the password.

Password

Password entry.

Add...
Opens the OSPF Interfaces Entry Add window
Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.

Note:
No entries can be modified in this table. If the operator wishes to do a modification, the
corresponding entry must be deleted and a new entry must be added.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

353

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.8 OSPF Interfaces Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces... > Add...

This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF interfaces Config table.

Notes:
To add an unnumbered interface, select the index number of the interface defined in the IP
Address table. The interface will then be identified with the Loopback address. The IP
Address field is grayed out.
The IP address of the interface lo:0 and all unnumbered interface will only be advertised, if
OSPF is enabled on lo:0. The fields that are left blank in this window, will automatically be
configured to the default values:

354

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Area

Backbone Area

Router Priority

Transit Delay

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Retransmission Interval 5
Hello Interval

10

Timeout

40

Password

none

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

355

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.9 OSPF Interface Metric Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interface
Metric...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Interface Metric.

Column

Description

IP Address

IP address of this OSPF interface.

Index

Unique identifier of the interface to which this


entry is applicable (see IP Address Table).

Metric Value [0..65535]

Metric on this interface.

356

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.10 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Interfaces...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Virtual Interfaces.

Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration window is
the OSPF Configuration .
Note:
If one (or both) of the virtual link endpoints are connected to the transit area via an
unnumbered link, it may be impossible to calculate the IP address of the virtual interface
and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link. No virtual interfaces
can be defined through areas with unnumbered links.

Column

Description

Area

Transit area that the Virtual Link traverses.

Virtual Neighbour

Router ID of the Virtual Neighbour.

State

OSPF virtual interface state.

Events

Number of state changes or error events on


this Virtual Link.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

357

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Transit Delay [0..3600


s]

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Estimated number of seconds it takes to


transmit a link-state update packet over this
interface.

Retransmission Interval Number of seconds between link-state


[0..3600 s]
advertisement retransmissions, for
adjacencies belonging to this interface.
Hello Interval [1..65535
s]

Number of seconds between the Hello


packets that the router sends on the interface.

Timeout
[1.. 2147483647 s]

Timeout interval. This timeout interval has to


be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).

Password Type

Type of the password.

Password

Password entry.

Add...
Opens the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add window.
Note:
Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values. The default value for timeout is 40
s, so it has to be changed manually.
The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).

Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.
Note:
No entries can be modified in this table. If the operator wishes to do a modification, the
corresponding entry must be deleted and a new entry must be added.

358

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.11 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Interfaces... -> Add...

This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Config list.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

359

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.12 OSPF Neighbours Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Neighbours...

This window displays information about OSPF neighbours. For each known neighbour there
is one entry (row) in this table.

Column

Description

IP Address

IP address of this neighbour.

Index

On an interface having an IP address: zero.


On unnumbered interfaces, the corresponding
value of the Index in the Internet Standard
MIB.

Neighbour Router ID

Unique identifier of the neighbour router in the


Autonomous System.

LSA Import

LSA import state with this neighbour


(OFF/ON).

Type-of-Service
Routing

Type-of-Service Routing state with this


neighbour (OFF/ON).

Neighbour Priority
[0..255]

Priority of this neighbour in the designated


router selection algorithm.

360

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

State

State of the relationship with this neighbour.

Events

Number of times this neighbour relationship


has changed state, or an error has occurred.

Retransmission Queue
Length

Current length of the retransmission queue.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

361

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.13 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Neighbours...

This window displays information about OSPF Virtual Neighbours.

Note:
If one (or both) of the virtual link endpoints are connected to the transit area via an
unnumbered link, it may be impossible to calculate the IP address of the virtual interface
and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link.

Column

Description

Area

Transit area identifier.

IP Address

IP address of this virtual neighbour.

Virtual Neighbour
Router ID

Unique identifier of the virtual neighbour


router.

LSA Import

LSA import state with this virtual neighbour


(OFF/ON).

Type-of-Service
Routing

Type-of-Service Routing state with this virtual


neighbour (OFF/ON).

362

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

State

State of the relationship with this virtual


neighbour.

Events

Number of times this virtual neighbour


relationship has changed state, or an error
has occurred.

Retransmission Queue
Length

Current length of the retransmission queue.

Hello Suppressed

Indicator whether Hellos are being


suppressed to the neighbour.

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry
Details window.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

363

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.14 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Neighbours... -> Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the Virtual Neighbours Info
list.

Notes:
The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s). The default value for timeout is 40
s, so it has to be changed manually.
Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values.

364

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.15 OSPF LSDB Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB...

This window displays information about the Link State Database of the SURPASS hiT 7070.
For each LSA in the database, there is one row in this table.

Column

Description

Area

Identifier of the Area from which the LSA was


received.

Type

Type of the Link State Advertisement.

Link State ID

Either a Router ID or an IP Address.

LSDB Router ID

Unique identifier of the originating router in the


Autonomous System.

Sequence

Sequence number.

Age [s]

Age of the link state advertisement in


seconds.

Checksum

Checksum of the complete contents of the


advertisement, excepting the age field.

Link State
Advertisement (LSA)

Number of Link State Advertisements.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

365

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF LSDB Entry Details window.

366

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.16 OSPF LSDB Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB... ->
Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF LSDB Info list.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

367

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.17 OSPF External LSDB Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> EXT LSDB...

This window displays information about the external LSA database in the SURPASS hiT
7070.

Column

Description

Type

Type of the external Link State Advertisement.

Link State ID

Either a Router ID or an IP Address.

Ext LSDB Router ID

Unique identifier of the originating external


router.

Sequence

Sequence number.

Age [s]

Age of the external link state advertisement in


seconds.

Checksum

Checksum of the complete contents of the


advertisement, excepting the Age field.

Ext Link State


Advertisement

Number of external Link State


Advertisements.

368

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF External LSDB Entry Details
window

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

369

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

33.18 OSPF External LSDB Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> EXT LSDB...
-> Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF EXT LSDB Info
list.

370

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

34 TCP Settings
34.1 TCP Connections Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> TCP Connections...

This window displays information about the listening TCP ports in the SURPASS hiT 7070
and all the currently established TCP connections.

There is one row in this table for each open TCP port in the SURPASS hiT 7070.

Column

Description

State

State of this TCP port: Port is in Listening


mode or a TCP connection is established.

Local Address

Local IP address for this TCP connection.

Local Port

Local port number for this TCP connection.

Remote Address

Remote IP address for this TCP connection.

Remote Port

Remote port number for this TCP connection.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

371

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the TCP Connections Entry Details
window.

Notes:
All ports in the SURPASS hiT 7070 are displayed in this table, including the ports used
internally.
The TCP connections which are established with TNMS systems (for management) can also
be displayed via the
Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration
-> MCF... -> Transport connections -> Information....
Here the IP connections can be identified by a 17-byte NSAP-like address which starts with
"54" and contains the IP address, e.g. 540072872203XXXXXXXXXXXX0100001.

372

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

34.2 TCP Connections Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> TCP Connections... -> Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the TCP Connections Info
list.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

373

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

35 Data
35.1 Subrack Data

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the Subrack
symbol -> Subrack Data...

Customer Specific tab:


In the Customer Specific tab, the customer can enter specific inventory data of the subrack.
Value range: 0...128 characters
Vendor Specific tab:
The Vendor Specific tab is read-only, displaying vendor specific inventory data of the subrack.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

375

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

35.2 ASIC Data Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol > Information -> ASIC Data...

This window gives information about the ASIC(s) on the card.

376

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

35.3 Copy Data

This window is accessible via the port connections (after clicking the symbol an interface card
or packet switch fabric card in the Module View), by using the context menu of a symbol in the
port list -> Subview... -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data... (or repeatedly Subview -> traffic
symbol -> Copy Data..., if applicable)

With this window, you can transfer alarm and data configurations of a AU4 or VCn to one or
more other objects of the same type, i.e. either from one card to another or object
configurations within the same card

Note:
Copy Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied
because of hardware limitations (possible equipping of the subrack).

Copy Items
This area allows to select the configuration types to be copied:
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

377

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Alarm configurations
Traffic configurations (not with AU4 traffic flow symbols)
Performance configurations (not with E12 and E3 traffic flow symbols)

Copy Units
This area displays the source to be copied, and allows to select the target(s). At least one
target must be selected.
To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to select all
entries in the list.

Copy Card Data


How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object

378

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

35.4 Copy Card Data

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol
(except SCOH and CLU) -> Copy Card Data...

This window allows to transfer data configurations of a card to one or more other empty
equivalent slots.

Note:
Copy Card Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be
copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).

Copy Units
This area displays the source to be copied, and allows to select the target(s). At least one
target must be selected.
To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to select all
entries in the list.

Copy Data
How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

379

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

35.5 DB Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Config DB Management...

In this window, you can configure DB management (VCDB) settings.


The VCDB contains the complete configuration data for the NE, stored in the SCOH drawer in
a non-volatile memory.
You can save the current VCDB for future use, by uploading it to the LCT/NCT or OS. You
can revert to that VCDB by downloading it from the LCT/NCT or OS, e. g. in case of a
card/software change or failure.

NE State
The NE State can be set to Active or Idle.

Active Config DB:


Configuration ID
Wrap-around counter which is increased on each persistent configuration change.
Config DB Action
Possible Settings:

380

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

NE State

Config DB Action

Active

no

Idle

no

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Set to Default Config DB


Set to Previous Config DB

How to Download VCDB Files

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

381

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

35.6 DB Download Dialog

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Config DB Management... (with NE State set to "idle") -> Download... -> (in the opened
window, select the relevant file) -> Open.

This window allows to control and monitor the DB download process.

By pressing the Start button, the download process begins.


By pressing the Stop button, the download process can be terminated.
Note: A stop of the download will cause a SCOH reboot, which does not affect the traffic.

How to Download VCDB Files

382

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

35.7 DB Upload Dialog

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Config DB Management... -> Upload... -> (in the opened window, enter the file name) ->
Save.

This window allows to control and monitor the DB upload process.

By pressing the Start button, the upload process begins.


By pressing the Stop button, the upload process can be terminated.

Note:
In case of DB upload, all empty slots will be set to Empty-Auto provisioning state, even if
configured to Empty before.

How to Upload VCDB Files

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

383

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

35.8 NE Logs Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Logs... -> NE Logs...

Configuration Log tab:


The list contains one entry for each single configuration change.
Click the column header to sort the column.
If an list entry is selected, the Show Details... button opens the Log Records Attribute
window.

Historical Event Log tab:


The list contains one entry (one single line) for each single alarm of the requested historical
event log.
Click the column header to sort the column.

Both NE logs can be saved using the Save button in the tool bar
or via the File -> Save as... command in the Main Menu.

384

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

35.9 Log Records Attribute

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Logs... -> NE Logs... (in the NE Logs Info window, Configuration Log tab, select an object) > Show Details...

This window displays details of the selected object.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

385

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

35.10 Copy to Permanent MACs


A very quick copy process window appears.

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of a PF2G5 port symbol -> Subview... -> RPR Switch -> Configuration... -> Learned
MACs tab -> Copy to Permanent button

This window shows the progress bar, symbolizing the copying process from the Learned
MACs list to the Permanent MACs list.

386

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

36 Performance
36.1 Ethernet Packet Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an Ethernet
card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Performance -> Packets...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

387

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The rows in the table display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when
ETH performance monitoring is enabled. If ETH performance monitoring is disabled, the
current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.

Display

Meaning

Value

Date, time, TMP and frames of the current interval

Current 15min

Corresponding entries

Current 24h

Corresponding entries

Tx

Incoming ETH traffic

Rx

Outgoing ETH traffic

TMP
Elapsed time in the interval.
Lost Frames Queue Overflow Rx
If the flow control is disabled and the input traffic exceeds the VC capacity or the value of the
admission control, there will be lost frames. So the corrupt frames are counted.
Multicast Frames
Pause frames which are triggered by the flow control, are counted as well.
Bad Frames CrC Error Rx
Corrupted frames which enter the port.
Dropped Frames Tx
Frames which are coming from the SDH side, and are being dropped. This may have the
following reasons:
The port is set to multichannel, the opposite side sends without being set to multichannel
mode, or vice versa.
The GFP Assignment ID (Extension header) is wrong.
Frames coming from SDH side are corrupted because of signal degrade.
Invalid VLAN or Untagged Frames (in case of IFQGBEB or IFQGBEB-E in VLAN modes)
Frames received at the gigabit port in downstream direction tagged with a VLAN ID not
assigned (unknown) to any downlink GFP channel or that are untagged.

Note: To see the current state, you need to push the Update button.

Previous 15 min tab:


The tab contains packet statistics, which were obtained within a 15 min interval. The last 16
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the oldest entry.
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

388

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Previous 24 h tab:
The tab contains packet statistics that were obtained within a 24 h interval. The last 3
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the oldest entry. 15 min intervals
are also contained in the list.
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

389

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

36.2 AU4 PJE Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n ->
Performance -> AU4 PJE...

This window contains a tab control with three cards: One for the current 15 min and 24 h
performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
Current
The rows in this field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when
AU4 performance monitoring is enabled. If AU4 performance monitoring is disabled, the
current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.

Display

Meaning

Date

Date of the current interval

Time

Time of the current interval

TMP

Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds)

390

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

-PJE

The negative pointer actions are counted

+PJE

The positive pointer actions are counted

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Previous 15 min tab:


The tab contains a list of pointer actions that occurred within a 15 min and 24 h interval. The
last 16 measuring intervals are displayed. Further entries overwrite the oldest entry.
Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h tab:
The tab contains a list of pointer actions that occurred within a 24 h (also 15 min) interval. The
last 3 measuring intervals are displayed. Further entries overwrite the oldest entries. 15 min
intervals are also contained in the list.
Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

391

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

36.3 STM-64 Gauge Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS10G card symbol -> Subview... -> STM-64 -> Performance -> OS Near End Gauge...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

392

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Enable TCA Monitoring

If the checkbox is cleared:


The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesnt depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display

Meaning

Date

Date of the current interval.

Time

Time of the current interval.

TMP

Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

Avg. BER

Average BER of the current interval

Max. BER

Maximal BER within the current interval

Available Time

Time within the current interval

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h:


TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper threshold or Lower
threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

393

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.

TCA Threshold Range:


The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:


Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

394

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

36.4 MSTTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> MS Near End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

If the checkbox is cleared:


The current 15 min values are deleted

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

395

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The remaining data is retained


The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display

Meaning

Date

Date of the current interval.

Time

Time of the current interval.

TMP

Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE

Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES

Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES

Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the


number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.

Layer

Threshold

VC2

30%

VC3

30%

VC4

30%

VC12

30%

STM-1 RS-Layer

30%

STM-1 MS-Layer

15%

396

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

STM-4 RS-Layer

50%

STM-4 MS-Layer

25%

STM-16 RS-Layer

75%

STM-16 MS-Layer

30%

STM-64 RS-Layer

40%

STM-64 MS-Layer

30%

UAS

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10


consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:


Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:


The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

397

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Previous 15 min tab:


Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

398

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

36.5 MSTTP Far End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> MS Far End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

If the checkbox is cleared:


The current 15 min values are deleted

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

399

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The remaining data is retained


The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display

Meaning

Date

Date of the current interval.

Time

Time of the current interval.

TMP

Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE

Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES

Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES

Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the


number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.

Layer

Threshold

VC2

30%

VC3

30%

VC4

30%

VC12

30%

STM-1 RS-Layer

30%

STM-1 MS-Layer

15%

400

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

STM-4 RS-Layer

50%

STM-4 MS-Layer

25%

STM-16 RS-Layer

75%

STM-16 MS-Layer

30%

STM-64 RS-Layer

40%

STM-64 MS-Layer

30%

UAS

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10


consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:


Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:


The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

401

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Previous 15 min tab:


Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

402

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

36.6 RSTTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> RS Near End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

If the checkbox is cleared:


The current 15 min values are deleted

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

403

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The remaining data is retained


The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesnt depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display

Meaning

Date

Date of the current interval.

Time

Time of the current interval.

TMP

Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE

Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES

Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES

Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the


number of Ebs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.

Layer

Threshold

VC2

30%

VC3

30%

VC4

30%

VC12

30%

STM-1 RS-Layer

30%

STM-1 MS-Layer

15%

404

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

STM-4 RS-Layer

50%

STM-4 MS-Layer

25%

STM-16 RS-Layer

75%

STM-16 MS-Layer

30%

STM-64 RS-Layer

40%

STM-64 MS-Layer

30%

UAS

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10


consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:


Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:


The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

405

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Previous 15 min tab:


Clear All Previous Values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:
Clear All Previous Values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

406

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

36.7 VCCTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an SDH
interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4
#n -> Performance -> Near End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
The errors/defects which are detected from the CTP of its own.

Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
Note:
The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

407

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

If the checkbox is cleared:


The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display

Meaning

Date

Date of the current interval.

Time

Time of the current interval.

TMP

Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE

Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES

Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES

Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the


number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.

UAS

Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after


10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10
consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During
unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.

408

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:


Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:


The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:


Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

409

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

410

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

36.8 VCCTP Far End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an SDH
interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4
#n -> Performance -> Far End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
The errors/defects which are detected from the far NE and send via G1/V5 byte.

Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
Note:
The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

411

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals.

If the checkbox is cleared:


The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display

Meaning

Date

Date of the current interval.

Time

Time of the current interval.

TMP

Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE

Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES

Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES

Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the


number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.

UAS

Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10


consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

412

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:


Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:


The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:


Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

413

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

414

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

36.9 VCTTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, e.g. by using the context
menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a
VC4 #n symbol) -> Performance -> Near End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
Note:
The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

415

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

If the checkbox is cleared:


The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display

Meaning

Date

Date of the current interval.

Time

Time of the current interval.

TMP

Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE

Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES

Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES

Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the


number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.

UAS

Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after


10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10
consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During
unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.

416

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:


Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:


The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:


Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

417

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

418

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

36.10 VCTTP Far End Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, e.g. by using the context
menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a
VC4 #n symbol) -> Performance -> Far End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
Note:
The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

419

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

If the checkbox is cleared:


The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display

Meaning

Date

Date of the current interval.

Time

Time of the current interval.

TMP

Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE

Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES

Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES

Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the


number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.

UAS

Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10


consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

420

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:


Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark grey color.

TCA Threshold Range:


The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:


Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

421

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

422

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

36.11 VC12 Near End Performance

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the
port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol -> Subview... > VC12 -> Performance... -> Near End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

If the checkbox is cleared:


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

423

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The current 15 min values are deleted


The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection:

Display

Meaning

Date

Date of the current interval.

Time

Time of the current interval.

TMP

Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE

Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES

Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES

Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the


number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.

UAS

Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10


consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:


Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
424

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:


The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:


Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

425

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

426

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

36.12 VC12 Far End Performance

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the
port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol -> Subview... > VC12 -> Performance... -> Far End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

If the checkbox is cleared:


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

427

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The current 15 min values are deleted


The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesnt depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection:

Display

Meaning

Date

Date of the current interval.

Time

Time of the current interval.

TMP

Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE

Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES

Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES

Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the


number of Ebs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.

UAS

Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10


consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:


Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.
428

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:


The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:


Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

429

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

430

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

36.13 GFP Frames Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> GFP
Group #n -> Performance -> GFP Frames...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

431

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The rows in the table display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when
ETH performance monitoring is enabled. If ETH performance monitoring is disabled, the
current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.

Display

Meaning

Date

Date of the current interval

Time

Time of the current interval

TMP

Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds)

Dropped Frames Tx

Discarded downstream frames due to queue overflow. (i.e.


tagged ethernet downstream on gigabit uplink exceeding
its assigned VC capacity)
One counter per GFP group, accumulating all contained
GFP channels.

Dropped Frames Rx

Transferred downstream ethernet frames from gigabit


uplink towards assigned downlink VC.
One counter per GFP group, accumulating all contained
GFP channels.

Average Throughput Rx
[bytes/s]

Average throughput of transferred downstream bytes of


ethernet frames in the passed measuring interval.

Previous 15 min tab:


The tab contains packet statistics, which where obtained within a 15 min interval. The last 16
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the last entry.
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h tab:
The tab contains packet statistics, which where obtained within a 24 h interval. The last 3
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the last entry. 15 min intervals are
also contained in the list.
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

432

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

37 IF7FE2GEL2 card
37.1 IF7FE2GEL2 - System Config
L2 Switch tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select L2 Switch tab).

General
System MAC address
Burned-In MAC Address in Hexadecimal Format
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

433

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Tunneling MAC Address


The Tunneling Mac Address used for Trasparent Transport Of Customer BPDUs.
Aging Timeout
The FDB entry's address aging timeout (in seconds).
Tag Protocol Interface
Enable protocol identifier selection, the value indicates that the frame carries the protocol tag
information
Rate Mode
********

GARP
Enable GVRP
The administrative status requested by management for GVRP. The value enabled (1)
indicates that GVRP should be enabled on this device, on all ports for which it has not been
specifically disabled. When disabled (2), GVRP is disabled on all ports and all GVRP packets
will be forwarded transparently.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Enable GMRP
The administrative status requested by management for GMRP. The value enabled(1)
indicates that GMRP should be enabled on this device, in all VLANs, on all ports for which it
has not been specifically disabled. When disabled(2), GMRP is disabled, in all VLANs, on all
ports and all GMRP packets will be forwarded transparently.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked

434

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Broadcast tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select Broadcast tab).

Broadcast mode
The item allows to disable or to enable three different broadcast storm recovery modes
- no broadcast storm (NoBS)
- Switch wide broadcast storm control (SwW)
- Per port broadcast storm control (PBS)

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

435

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

- Per port bandwith policing (PBwP)


Switch Wide Limit
This item store the limit to be used switch wide (i.e. on all the ports)
Due to the Purple limitation no more than 8 items can be created . This value can be setup in
64 Kbps steps up to the port capacity (10 , 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps)
Broadcast ID/ Policing ID
This object represents an istance out of 8 policing values in this table
Broadcast Storm Rate / Policing rate
This table store committed broadcast storm rate value over witch the exceeding broadcast
packets are discarded. This table store committed policing rate values. This is the sstained
rate permitted by policing.
Due to the Purple limitation no more than 8 items can be created . This value can be setup in
64 Kbps steps up to the port capacity (10 , 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps)

436

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

STP tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select STP tab).

Spanning Tree Protocol Enabled


Spanning tree operational status on the switch.
1: Checked / Enabled
2: Unchecked / Disabled
Force Version
The MST configuration force protocol version.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

437

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

1: STP
2: Rapid STP
3: Multi STP
MST Region Name
The MST configuration name of at most 32 characters.
Revision
The MST configuration revision. The default value is 1.
Digest Key
The MST configuration digest key.
Value as Hexadecimal.
Format Selector
The MST configuration format selector. A value different from 0 (zero) indicates non-support
for the IEEE 802.1s standard is not supported.
The MST tab is only available when the Force Version has the value Multi STP
If the Spanning Tree Protocol Enabled is enable and the user wants to change the Force
Version, then a Warning message "For Configuring the STP Force Version you must disable
STP Globally Enabled first!" will be shown.

438

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

CST tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select CST tab).

CONFIG
Bridge Hello Time [1..10 s]
The MSTP bridge hello time for the CIST. The default value is 2.
Bridge Forward Delay [4..30 s]
The MSTP bridge forward delay for the CIST. The default value is 15.
Bridge Max Age
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

439

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The MSTP bridge max age for the CIST.


Rules:
2 * (BHT + 1) <= BMA <= 2 * (BFD - 1)
BHT - Bridge Hello Time
BMA - Bridge Max Age
BFD - Bridge Forward Delay
Bridge Priority
The MSTP bridge priority in a specific instance. The priority is in the increments of 4096. The
recommended default value is 32768.
0 | 4096 | 8192 | 12288 | 16384 | 20480 | 24576 | 28672 | 32768 | 36864 | 40960 | 45056 |
49152 | 53248 | 57344 | 61440
Status
Max Age [s]
The MSTP root port max age for the CIST, in units of hundredths of a second.
Forward Delay [s]
The MSTP root port forward delay for the CIST, in units of hundredths of a second.
Hello Time [s]
The amount of time between the transmission of Configuration bridge PDUs by this node on
any port when it is the root of the spanning tree or trying to become so, in units of hundredths
of a second.
Bridge Hold Time [s]
The MSTP bridge hold time for the CIST, in units of hundredths of a second.
CST Regional Root ID
The MSTP regional root identifier for the CIST.
Hexadecimal format.
Regional Root Path Cost
The MSTP regional root path cost for the CIST.
Bridge ID
The MSTP bridge identifier for this CIST.
Hexadecimal format.
Time Since Topology Change
The MSTP time since the last topology change for this CIST.
It is displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Topology Change Count
The MSTP count of topology changes for this CIST.
440

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Topology Change Parameter


The MSTP topology change parameter for this CIST.
1: True
2: False
Root Port ID
The MSTP root port ID for this CIST.
Hexadecimal format.
Designated Root ID
The MSTP designated root bridge identifier for this CIST.
Hexadecimal format.
Root Path Cost
The MSTP root path cost for this CIST.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

441

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

MST tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select MST tab).

MST ID [1..4094]
The MSTP instance ID.
Range: 1..4094
Bridge Priority [0.61440]
The MSTP bridge priority in a specific instance. The priority is in the increments of 4096. The
recommended default value is 32768.
442

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Bridge ID
The MSTP bridge identifier in a specific instance.
Hexadecimal Value
Designated Root ID
The MSTP designated root bridge identifier.
Hexadecimal Value.
Root Path Cost
The MSTP root path cost.
Value as delivered.
Root Port ID
The MSTP root port ID.
Hexadecimal Value.
Time Since Topology Change
The MSTP time since the last topology change.
It is displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Topology Change Count
The MSTP count of topology changes.
Topology Change Parameter
The MSTP topology change parameter.
Value
1: True
2: False
VLANs
The NSTP VLAN-IDs list.
String with the VLAN-IDs separated by ";"

Buttons Function
Add
Opens the MST Entry Add window.
Modify
Only visible if an entry in the MST Grid is selected.
Delete
Only visible if an entry in the MST Table is selected. Deletes the selected Entry.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

443

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Opens the message box "Delete selected MST Entry?" on delete.

IGMP Snooping tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select IGMP Snooping tab).

IGMP Snooping Enabled


This enables or disables IGMP Snooping on the system. Default values is disabled
1: Checked /Enabled
444

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

2: Unchecked / Disabled
Interval
IGMP group interval time on the system. This is time that the switch will wait before deleting
the interface from the entry because it do not receive a report from a particular interface.
Default value is 260s. Range 1:3600
Max Response Time
It is possible to configure the IGMP snooping max response time for the system. The max
response time is the time that the switch will wait after sending a query in an interface
because it does not receive a report from a particular group in that interface. Default value is
10s . Range 1:3600
Expiration time
It is possible to configure the IGMP snooping max expiration time. It is the time that the
switch will wait for a query to be received on an interface before the interface is removed
from the list of the interface with a multicast routers attached. Default value is 0s. Range
0:3600
Multicast Control Frames Processed
Multicast Control Frames Processed by the CPU. The number of multicast control frames that
have been processed by the CPU
Port IGMP Snooping Disabled
Shows all available Ports configured in this card.
Port IGMP Snooping Enabled
LCT / OS can configure the IGMP Snooping operation per port. The value enable indicates
that IGMP Snooping is enable on this port in all VLAs . A value disable indicates that IGMP
Snooping is disabled on the port in all VLANs.
Show the selected Available Ports. Multiple selection supported.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

445

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

COS tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select COS tab).

User Priority
The default ingress User Priority for this port.
A table that contains information about the 802.1p prioeity mapping to traffic class priority
queue for every physical port.
User Priority [0..7]
Traffic Class [0..3]
446

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Traffic class priority queue the received frame is mapped to.

VLAN Translation tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Translation tab).

VLAN Change Mode


The item allows to disable or to enable such different VLAN change modes
No Change (NoCh)
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

447

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Per VLANID change (Vch)


Per port change (Pch)
Per port and per VLAN ID change (PVCh)
VLAN ID
The VLAN-ID or other identifier refering to this VLAN.
Egress VLAN Id
The set of ports which are permanently assigned to the egress list for this VLAN by
management.

VLAN Priority tab

448

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Priority tab).

VLAN ID
The VLAN-ID or other identifier refering to this VLAN.
VLAN Mode
It is possible via LCT/TNMS to configure the mode of operation for a VLAN Id.

Trap tab

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

449

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select Trap tab).

Link Up/Down
Link Up/Link Down traps for the entire switch.
values
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Spanning Tree
This flag enables the sending of new root traps and topology change notification traps.
values
1: Checked
2: Unchecked

450

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Mirroring tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select Mirroring tab).

Mirroring Mode
Port mirroring mode:
Enable : enable mirroring mode
Disable : disable mirroring mode
Delete : clear mirrored port and probe

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

451

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Port configuration : shows the probe port


Probe Port
Shows the probe port
Mirrored Port
Shows the mirrored port.

452

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.2 IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select MST tab) -> Add pushbutton.

MST ID
The MSTP instance ID
Range: 1..4094
VLANs
Available
Shows all VLANs currently configured into the device by management, or dynamically created
as a result of GVRP requests received.
Multiple selection supported.
Selected
Multiple selection supported.

Note
The maximum number of entrys in the MST is 4. When the user trys to set a 5th entry, a
warning message "Only 4 MST IDs are allowed!" is shown.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

453

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

When the user changes the value "Multi STP" in the Field Force Version, in the L2 Switch
Tab, this window closes.

454

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.3 IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select MST tab) -> select on
entry -> Modify push-button.

MST ID
The MSTP instance ID
Range: 1..4094
VLANs
Available
Shows all VLANs currently configured into the device by management, or dynamically created
as a result of GVRP requests received.
Multiple selection supported.
Selected
Multiple selection supported.

Note
The maximum number of entrys in the MST is 4. When the user trys to set a 5th entry, a
warning message "Only 4 MST IDs are allowed!" is shown.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

455

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

When the user changes the value "Multi STP" in the Field Force Version, in the L2 Switch
Tab, this window closes.

456

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.4 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Priority) -> Add
push-button.

Priority ID
It is possible via LCT/TNMS to configure different priority Mapping based on VLAN Mode
configured per VLAN
Priority In Pri Based
The incoming priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer
priority
Priority Tos Based
The IP TOS value of the incoming packet which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer
priority
Priority VLAN In Based
The outgoing priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure mapped to different
value based on Priority Mode

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

457

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.5 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Priority) -> select
an entry row -> Modify push-button.

Port VLAN ID [1..4094]


The PVID, the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on
this port.
Priority ID
It is possible via LCT/TNMS to configure different priority Mapping based on VLAN Mode
configured per VLAN
Priority In Pri Based
The incoming priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer
priority
Priority Tos Based
The IP TOS value of the incoming packet which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer
priority
Priority VLAN In Based
The outgoing priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure mapped to different
value based on Priority Mode
458

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Status
The status of Vlan Priority Map Entry

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

459

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.6 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Config


Permanent MACs tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> (select Permanent MACs tab).

PERMANENT MACS
The switchs static Mac filtering table
VLAN ID
The Static MAC Filter Vlan Id.
MAC Address
The Static MAC Filter MAC address.
Destination Port Names
The Static MAC Filter destination port mask.

460

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Learned MACs tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> (select Learned MACs tab).

Learned MACs
The Multicast Forwarding Database Table.
VLAN ID
Vlan Index for which this entry is associated with.
Value as Delivered.
MAC Address
A unicast MAC address for which the device has forwarding and/or filtering information.
Port Name
Either the value '0', or the port number of the port on which a frame having a source address
equal to the value of the corresponding instance of Address has been seen.
String with the port name or "0".
Status
The status of this entry.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

461

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

1: Other
2: Invalid
3: Learned
4: Self
5: Mgmt

462

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.7 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> Add push-button.

VLAN ID
The Static MAC Filter Vlan ID.
MAC Address
The Static MAC Filter MAC address.
Destination Ports
Shows all possible Destination ports configured in this card.
Note:
The value in the Field MAC Address is checked and if is invalid a error Message "Wrong MAC
Address! The first byte of the Adress must be even for Unicast Addresses."

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

463

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.8 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> (select an entry in the table) ->
Modify push-button.

VLAN ID
The Static MAC Filter Vlan ID.
Destination Ports
Shows all possible Destination ports configured in this card.

464

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.9 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Config


Permanent MACs tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> Permanent MACs tab.

PERMANENT MACS
The switch's static Mac filtering table
VLAN ID
Vlan Index for which this entry is associated with.
Value as Delivered.
MAC Address
A multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information.
Destination Port
Shows all possible Destination ports configured in this card.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

465

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Registered MACs tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> Registered MACs tab.

Registered MACs
The Multicast Forwarding Database table
VLAN ID
Vlan Index for which this entry is associated with.
MAC Address
A multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering information.
Protocol
The component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding Database.
1: Static
2: GMRP
3: IGMP
Type
This displays the type of the entry.
1: Static
2: Dinamic

466

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Description
Text description of this multicast table entry.
Forward Ports
BitMask indicating which ports this entry indicates should be forwarded.
Filter Ports
BitMask indicating which ports this entry indicates should be filtered.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

467

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.10 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: :
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> Add push-button.

VLAN ID
The Static MAC Filter Vlan Id.
MAC Address
The Static MAC Filter MAC address.
Destination Ports
Available : Shows all possible Destination Ports configured in this card.
Selected : Shows the selected Destination Ports.
When setting this value, the system will ignore configuration for ports not between the first
and last valid ports. Configuration of any port numbers between this range that are not valid
ports return a failure message, but will still apply configuration for valid ports.
Multiple selection supported.

Note:
The value in the Field MAC Address is checked and if is invalid a error Message "Wrong MAC
Address! The first byte of the Adress must be odd for Multicast Addresses."

468

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.11 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> (select an entry in the table) > Modify push-button.

VLAN ID
The Static MAC Filter Vlan Id.
Destination Ports
Available : Shows all possible Destination Ports configured in this card.
Selected : Shows the selected Destination Ports.
When setting this value, the system will ignore configuration for ports not between the first
and last valid ports. Configuration of any port numbers between this range that are not valid
ports return a failure message, but will still apply configuration for valid ports.
Multiple selection supported.
Note:
The value in the Field MAC Address is checked and if is invalid a error Message "Wrong MAC
Address! The first byte of the Adress must be odd for Multicast Addresses."

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

469

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.12 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port config

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports...

A list of interface entries.


Port Name
A unique value for each interface.
MAC Address
A Multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering information.
Administrative Status
The desired state of the interface.
1: Up
2: Down
3: Testing
Operational Status
The current operational state of the interface.
1: Up
2: Down
3: Testing

470

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Port VLAN ID [1..4094]


The PVID, the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on
this port.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

471

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.13 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Management Config


General tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> General tab.

GENERAL
802.3ad LACP Mode
Enable/disable 802.3ad LACP on this port.
Values
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Administrative Mode
The switch's Port Admin Mode.
Local Ports:
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Logical Ports:
1: Enabled
472

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

2: Disabled
Auto-Negotiation
This object identifies the administration status of auto negotiation for this port.
Freeze MAC Address Learning
Manager can freeze all the dynamically learned MAC addresses assocated to a port, and stop
the learning mode on this port.
1: Freeze
2: Unfreeze
Double VLAN Tag Mode
Controls the Double Vlan Tag mode on this port.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Double VLAN Tag Customer ID [0..4095]
Configures the Customer ID for the Double Vlan Tag for this port.
Range: 0..4095
Maximum Frame Size
This object identifies the largest value that can be configured for agentPortMaxFrameSize.
Enable Maximum Frame Size
This object identifies the currently configured maximum frame size value for this port. The
maximum value that this object can be set to is the value of agentPortMaxFrameSizeLimit.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

473

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

VLAN tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> VLAN tab.

VLAN
Port VLAN ID [1..4094]
The PVID, the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on
this port.
Range: 2..4094
Acceptable Frames Filtering
When this is admitOnlyVlanTagged (2) the device will discard untagged frames or PriorityTagged frames received on this port. When admitAll(1), untagged frames or Priority-Tagged
frames received on this port will be accepted and assigned to the PVID for this port.
1: Admit all
2: Admit only VLAN tagged
Default User Priority [0..7]
The default ingress User Priority for this port.

474

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

GVRP/GMRP tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> GVRP/GMRP tab.

GVRP/GMRP
GVRP Port Status
The administrative state of GMRP operation on this port. The value enabled (1) indicates that
GMRP is enabled on this port in all VLANs as long as dot1dGmrpStatus is also enabled (1). A
value of disabled(2) indicates that GMRP is disabled on this port in all VLANs: any GMRP
packet received will be silently discarded and no GMRP registrations will be propagated from
other ports.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
GMRP Port Status
The state of GVRP operation on this port. The value enabled (1) indicates that GVRP is
enabled on this port, as long as dot1qGvrpStatus is also enabled for this device. When
disabled (2) but dot1qGvrpStatus is still enabled for the device, GVRP is disabled on this port:
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
GARP TIMERS
Join Time [1..100 cs]
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

475

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

A table of GARP control information about every bridge port.


Range: 1..100
Leave Time [20..600 cs]
The GARP Leave time, in centiseconds.
Range: 20..600
Leave All Time [200..6000 cs]
The GARP LeaveAll time, in centiseconds.
Range: 200..6000

STP tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> STP tab.

STP
STP Port State
The administrative STP state for the port.

476

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The default port STP state is enabled for the first 4095 ports and disabled for any ports
beyond.
1: Checked / Enabled
2: Unchecked / Disabled
Port Up Time Since Counter were Cleared
Time since port was reset. It is displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Note: For a correct handling of LAG, the STP should be enabled on the involved ports.

CST tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> CST tab.

CONFIG
Edge State
The administrative state of a specific port in CIST.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

477

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The default port state is disabled.


Port Priority [0..240]
The MSTP port priority in CIST. The priority is in the increments of 16.
The default value is 128.
Range: 1..240
Port Path Cost [0..200000000]
The MSTP port path cost in CIST. The default value will correspond to the recommendation
specified in IEEE 802.1s Table 13-2 which varies depending upon link speed.
Range: 0..200000000
STATUS
Operation Status of Edge Port
The MSTP operational status of a specific port for the CIST.
1: Enable
2: Disable
Is Part of P2P Link
The MSTP operational point to point mac of a specific port for the CIST.
1: True
2: False
Port ID
The MSTP port identifier of a specific port in CIST.
Port Forwarding State
The MSTP forwarding state of a specific port in CIST.
1: Discarding
2: Learning
3: Forwarding
4: Disabled
5: Manual Fwd
6: Not Participate
Designated Bridge ID
The MSTP designated bridge ID of a specific port in CIST.
Designated Port ID
The MSTP designated port ID of a specific port in CIST.

478

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Designated Cost
The MSTP designated cost of a specific port in CIST.
Topology Changing
The MSTP topology change acknowledge for a specific port in the CIST.
1: True
2: False
Port Role
The STP port role.

MST tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> MST tab.

MST ID [1..4094]
The MSTP instance ID
Port Priority [0..240]
The MSTP port priority in CIST. The priority is in the increments of 16.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

479

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The default value is 128.


Range: 1..240
Port Path Cost [0..200000000]
The MSTP port path cost in CIST. The default value will correspond to the recommendation
specified in IEEE 802.1s Table 13-2 which varies depending upon link speed.
Range: 0..200000000
Port ID
The MSTP port identifier of a specific port in a specific instance.
Value as Delivered.
Port Forwarding State
The MSTP forwarding state of a specific port in CIST.
1: Discarding
2: Learning
3: Forwarding
4: Disabled
5: Manual Fwd
6: Not Participate
Designated Bridge ID
The MSTP designated bridge ID of a specific port in a specific instance.
Designated Port ID
The MSTP designated port ID of a specific port in a specific instance.
Designated Cost
The MSTP designated cost of a specific port in a specific instance.
Port Role
The STP port role.

480

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Policing tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> Policing tab.

Policing
This item indicates the status of the port policing control that can be:
1: checked / enabled
2: unchecked /disabled

Broadcast Limit /Policing CIR


This specifies the bandwith limit of the indexed port, over which the broadcast packets are
discarded.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

481

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Tunnelling tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> Tunnelling tab.

Network Interface Mode


The Switch's Port is configured either in UNI or NNI Mode.
1: User to Network Interface
2: Network to Network Interface
BPDU Tunneling
The switch's Port is configured for BPDU Tunneling.
1: Tunneling
2: No Tunneling
This Box is deactivated if the Port is Configured in UNI mode.

482

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

VLAN Translation tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> VLAN Translation tab.

Egress VLAN ID
The item represents an egress vlan Id that replaces the incoming vlan Id on the incoming
port. This table is significant if Vlan Change Mode is equal to "Per port change" . It store the
out Vlan ID Tag that translate the ingress tags received on the port Id.
Incoming Vlan Id
It represents an istance of incoming Vlan Id.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

483

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Egress QoS tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> Egress QoS tab.

Number of Egress Traffic Classes


The number of egress traffic classes supported on this port.
A table of Queueing Mode parameters.
Queue ID
The queue id of the specific queue for which the parameters are to be get or set.
Queueing Mode
The queue mode to be set or get for the specified queue.
1: Disabled
2: Strict Priority Queueing
3: Weighted Fair Queueing
Queueing Weight Factor
Weight Factor is a 16 bit value which limits total bandwidth that a queue occupies in case of
congestion.

484

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Deficit Count
The deficit count for the queue, a 21 bit value which is reduced by the packet length for every
packet transmitted from the queue.

Traffic Shaping tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management
push-button... -> Traffic Shaping tab.

Port rate
This item indicates the committed traffic shaping rate. This is the sustained rate permitted by
the traffic-shaping.
Queue ID
The queue id of the specific queue for which the parameters are to be get or set.
Queue rate
This item indicates the committed traffic shaping rate. This is the sustained rate permitted by
the traffic-shaping
This value can be setup in 64kps steps up to the port cpacity (10, 100, Mbps or 1 Gbps).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

485

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.14 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Statistics Information


ETH Packets tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port
Statistics... -> ETH Packets tab.

ETH PACKETS
A list of interface entries.
Unicast Packets Rx
The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
Unicast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a
subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Broadcast Packets Rx
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were
addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.

486

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Broadcast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which
were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded
or not sent.
Multicast Packets Rx
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were
addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.
Multicast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which
were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded
or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.
FCS Errors
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in
length but do not pass the FCS check.
Frames too long
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted
frame size.

STP tab

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

487

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port
Statistics... -> STP tab.

STP BPDU Rx
The STP BPDUs received on a specific port.
STP BPDU Tx
The STP BPDUs sent from a specific port.
RSTP BPDU Rx
The RSTP BPDUs received on a specific port.
RSTP BPDU Tx
The RSTP BPDUs sent from a specific port.
MSTP BPDU Rx
The MSTP BPDUs received on a specific port.
MSTP BPDU Tx
The MSTP BPDUs sent from a specific port.

488

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.15 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG...

Lag ID
This value corresponds with the Lag interface in the ifTable
Name
The associated name of the LAG used during creation
Link Trap
Configures sending traps when the LAG interface goes up or down
1 : checked
2 : unchecked
Administrative mode
Administratively enables or disables this LAG
Type
Lag Type
1: static
2: dynamic
LAG ID Ports
Port speed
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

489

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

LAG port speed


Port
Lag port index
Status
Lag port status
1: active
2: inactive

490

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.16 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG... -> Add... push button.

Name
The associated name of the LAG used during creation

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

491

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.17 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push button.

Name
The associated name of the LAG used during creation
Link Trap
Configures sending traps when the LAG interface goes up or down
1 : checked
2 : unchecked
Administrative mode
Administratively enables or disables this LAG
Type
Lag Type

492

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.18 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Statistics Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG... -> (select an entry in the table) -> LAG Statistics push
button.

Unicast Packets Rx
The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
Unicast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a
subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Broadcast Packets Rx
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were
addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
Broadcast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which
were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded
or not sent.
Multicast Packets Rx
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were
addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

493

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Multicast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which
were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded
or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.
FCS Errors
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets
in length but do not pass the FCS check.
Frames too long
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted
frame size.
Errors Occurred RX
The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them form being delivered
Ethernet statistics Index
The value of this item uniquely identifies this entry.
Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of
resources.
Octets
The total number of octets of data received on the network.
Packets
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast
packets) received.
Broadcast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note
that this does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
CRC Align Errors
The total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and 1518 octets,
inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of
octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were otherwise
well formed.
Oversize Packets
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and were otherwise
well formed.

494

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.19 IF7FE2GEL2 - Group Config

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Groups...

Group
This specifies the Rx Water Mark Port Group number
Ports
Rx Water Port Group string

Flow Control
Config flowcontrol allows you to configure the flow control for this port.
1: Asymmetrical Rx
2: Asymmetrical Tx
3: Symmetrical
4: Disabled
Note:
Fast Ethernet ports do not support asymmetrical modes.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

495

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Drop
This specifies the Rx Water Mark Drop value.

496

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.20 IF7FE2GEL2 - Groups Queue Entry Config

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Groups... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Queue Config...
push button.

Group
This specifies the Port Group number
Queue
This specifies TX Water Mark Queue number
Water Mark
This specifies Tx Water Mark Value for the Port Group queue.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

497

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.21 IF7FE2GEL2 - Trap info


Current tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Traps... -> Current tab.

FILTER
Severity
The alarm severity selection
Trap
Selection of Trap
Set Filter
Filter selection

498

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

TRAP
The traps sent since last viewed.
Time
System uptime when trap was sent. Shows how long the system has been up when the trap
occurred.
It is displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Severity
The severity associated

Trap

Object

Severity

Threshold

broadcastStormStartTr
ap

Port

Minor

The broadcastStormStart trap is issued


when the number of broadcast packets
received in a second from a port is
higher than the broadcast threshold (via
sysConfigBroadcastThreshold).

broadcastStormEndTra Port
p

Cleared (Not
Alarmed)

The broadcastStormStop trap is issued


when the number of broadcast packets
received in a second from a port is
lower than the broadcast threshold (i.e.
signals that a BroadcastStormStart
dont exist anymore).

linkDown

Port

Major

The linkDown trap is issued when the


sending protocol entity recognizes a
failure in one of the communication
links represented in the agent's
configuration.

linkUp

Port

Cleared (Not
Alarmed)

The linkUp trap is issued when the


sending protocol entity recognizes that
one of the communication links
represented in the agent's configuration
has come up (i.e. signals that a
linkDown dont exist anymore).

RemoteFault

Port

Minor

The RemotFault trap is issued when the


attached remote device signals to the
local end a fault condition.

NoRemoteFault

Port

Cleared (Not
Alarmed)

The NoRemotFault trap is issued when


the attached remote device signals to
the local end a removed fault condition.

MismatchAutoNegotiati
on

Port

Minor

The MismatchAutoNegotiation trap is


issued on local device, when the
remote device does not support the
required operation parameters.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

499

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

NoMismatchAutoNegoti Port
ation

Cleared (Not
Alarmed)

The NoMismatchAutoNegotiation trap is


issued on local device, when the
remote device supports the required
operation parameters (i.e. signals that a
MismatchAutoNegotiation does not
exist anymore).

NoCompleteAutoNegoti Port
ation

Major

The NoCompleteAutoNegotiation trap is


issued on local device, when the Auto
Negotiation process was not completed
within 10s.

CompleteAutoNegotiati
on

Port

Cleared (Not
Alarmed)

The CompleteAutoNegotiation trap is


issued on local device, when the
AutoNegotiation process was
completed within 10s.

NoValidCDB

Card

Major

The NoValidCDB trap is issued when


the CDB (Configuration Data Base/MIB)
file is not valid (corrupted, wrong
format, etc.)

ValidCDB

Card

Cleared (Not
Alarmed)

The ValidCDB trap is issued when the


CDB (Configuration Data Base/MIB) file
is valid.

500

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

History tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Traps... -> History tab.

LOG
Time
System uptime when trap was sent. Shows how long the system has been up when the trap
occurred.
It is displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Description
Description of the trap sent

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

501

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.22 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Config

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Configuration.

This table contains information about every aggregate that is associated with the System
Aggregator ID
The aggregate ID associated with the System
MAC Address
A read only value carrying the individual MAC address assigned to the Aggregator
System Priority
A read-write value indicating the priority value associated with the Actors System ID
System ID
Read-write Mac Address value used as a unique identifier for the system that contains this
aggregator
Aggregator config
A read only Boolean value indicating whether the aggregator represents an aggregate
(TRUE) or an individual link (FALSE)
Administrator key
The current administrative value of the key for the aggregator
Operational Key
The current operational value of the key for the aggregator

502

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Partner System ID
A read only Mac address value consisting of the unique identifier for the current protocol
Partner of this aggregator. A value of zero indicates that there is no known partner. If the
aggregation is manually configured this system ID value will be a value assigned by the local
system
Partner System Priority
A read only value that indicates the priority value associated with the Partner System ID. If the
aggregation is manually configured this system priority value will be a value assigned by the
local system
Partner Operational Key
The current operational value of the key for the aggregators current protocol partner
Collector Max Delay
This value defines the maximum delay, in terms of microsecond, that may be imposed by the
frame collector between receiving a frame from an aggregate Parser , and either delivering
the frame to its MAC Client or discarding the frame

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

503

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.23 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Configuration -> (select an entry in the table) ->
Details push button.

Aggregator ID
The aggregate ID associated with the System
Port Name
Either the value '0', or the port number of the port on which a frame having a source address
equal to the value of the corresponding instance of Address has been seen.
String with the port name or "0".
System ID Priority
A read-write value indicating the priority value associated with the Actors System ID
System ID
Read-write Mac Address value used as a unique identifier for the system that contains this
aggregator
Administrator key
The current administrative value of the key for the aggregator
Port Key
The current operational value of the key for the aggregation port. Range 0..65535
504

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Administrative Partner priority


A read-write value used to define the administrative value of priority associated with the
partners System ID
Operational Partner Priority
A read only value indicating the operational value of priority associated with the Partners
System ID
Administrative Partner System ID
A read-write MAC Address value representing the administrative value of the Aggregation
Ports protocol Partner System ID
Partner System ID
A read only Mac address value consisting of the unique identifier for the current protocol
Partner of this aggregator. A value of zero indicates that there is no known partner. If the
aggregation is manually configured this system ID value will be a value assigned by the local
system
Administrative Partner Key
The current administrative value of the key for the protocol Partner
Operational partner key
The current operational value of the key for the protocol Partner
Selected Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has currently selected. Zero
indicates that the Aggregation Port has not selected an aggregator, either because it is in the
process of detaching from an aggregate or because there is no suitable aggregator available
for it to select
Attached Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the aggregator that this aggregator port is currently attached to. Zero
indicates that the aggregation Port is not currently attached to an aggregator
Port number
The port number locally assigned to the aggregation Port
Port priority
The priority value assigned to this aggregation port.
Administrative Port Number
The current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner
Operational Port number
The operational port number assigned to this aggregation Port by the aggregation Ports
protocol partner
Port priority
Value of the port priority for the protocol partner

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

505

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Operational Port priority


The priority value assigned to this aggregation Port by the partner
Port Administrative state
A string corresponding to the administrative value of the Port state
Port operational State
A string corresponding to the operational value of the Port state
Port partner administrative State
A string corresponding to the administrative value of the state of the protocol partner
Port Partner Operational State
A string corresponding to the operational value of the state of the protocol partner
Port Aggregator config
A read only Boolean value indicating whether the aggregator represents an aggregate
(TRUE) or an individual link (FALSE)

506

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.24 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Configuration -> (select an entry in the table) ->
Modify push button.

Aggregator ID
The aggregate ID associated with the System
Port Name
Either the value '0', or the port number of the port on which a frame having a source address
equal to the value of the corresponding instance of Address has been seen.
String with the port name or "0".
System ID Priority
A read-write value indicating the priority value associated with the Actors System ID
System ID
Read-write Mac Address value used as a unique identifier for the system that contains this
aggregator
Administrator key
The current administrative value of the key for the aggregator
Port Key
The current operational value of the key for the aggregation port. Range 0..65535
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

507

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Administrative Partner priority


A read-write value used to define the administrative value of priority associated with the
partners System ID
Operational Partner Priority
A read only value indicating the operational value of priority associated with the Partners
System ID
Administrative Partner System ID
A read-write MAC Address value representing the administrative value of the Aggregation
Ports protocol Partner System ID
Partner System ID
A read only Mac address value consisting of the unique identifier for the current protocol
Partner of this aggregator. A value of zero indicates that there is no known partner. If the
aggregation is manually configured this system ID value will be a value assigned by the local
system
Administrative Partner Key
The current administrative value of the key for the protocol Partner
Operational partner key
The current operational value of the key for the protocol Partner
Selected Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has currently selected. Zero
indicates that the Aggregation Port has not selected an aggregator, either because it is in the
process of detaching from an aggregate or because there is no suitable aggregator available
for it to select
Attached Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the aggregator that this aggregator port is currently attached to. Zero
indicates that the aggregation Port is not currently attached to an aggregator
Port number
The port number locally assigned to the aggregation Port
Port priority
The priority value assigned to this aggregation port
Administrative Port Number
The current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner
Operational Port number
The operational port number assigned to this aggregation Port by the aggregation Ports
protocol partner
Port priority
Value of the port priority for the protocol partner

508

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Operational Port priority


The priority value assigned to this aggregation Port by the partner
Port Administrative state
A string corresponding to the administrative value of the Port state
Port operational State
A string corresponding to the operational value of the Port state
Port partner administrative State
A string corresponding to the administrative value of the state of the protocol partner
Port Partner Operational State
A string corresponding to the operational value of the state of the protocol partner
Port Aggregator config
A read only Boolean value indicating whether the aggregator represents an aggregate
(TRUE) or an individual link (FALSE)

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

509

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.25 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Statistics Info

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Statistics...

Interface
Port name
LACPDU Rx
The number of valid LACPDUs received on this aggregation port
Marker PDU Rx
The number of valid Marker PDUs received on this aggregation port
Marker Response PDU
The number of valid Marker Response PDUs received on this aggregation port

510

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Unknown Rx
The number of frames received that either carry the Slow Protocol Ethernet Type value but
contain an unknown PDU or are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do
not carry the Slow Protocol Ethernet Type
Illegal Rx
The number of frames received that carry the Slow Protocol Ethernet Type value but contain
a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol subtype
LACPDU Tx
The number of valid LACPDUs transmitted on this aggregation port
Marker PDU Tx
The number of Marker PDUs transmitted on this aggregation port
Marker Response PDU
The number of Marker Response PDUs transmitted on this aggregation port

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

511

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.26 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Debug

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Debug...

Filter

Interface
Port name
Port Name
An unique value for each interface
Rx State
The receive state machine for the Aggregation Port
1. Current

512

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

2. Expired
3. Defaulted
4. Initialize
5. LACP Disabled
6. Port Disabled
Last Rx Time
The value of time when the last LACPDU was received by this Aggregation Port
It is displayed in days, hours, minutes and second
Mux State
The value of the MUX state machine for the Aggregation Port
1. Detached
2. Waiting
3. Attached
4. Collecting
5. Distributing
6. Collecting-distributing
Mux reason
A human-readable text string indicating the reason for the most recent change of MUX state
machine
Churn State
The state of the Actor Churn Detection machine for the Aggregation Port. A value of
"noCHURN" indicates that the state machine is either the NO_ACTOR_CHURN or the
ACTOR_CHURN_MONITOR state, and "churn" indicates that the state machine is in the
ACTOR_CHURN state
Partner Churn State
The state of the Partner Churn Detection machine for the Aggregation Port. A value of
"noCHURN" indicates that the state machine is either the NO_PARTNER_CHURN or the
PARTNER_CHURN_MONITOR state, and "churn" indicates that the state machine is in the
PARTNER_CHURN state
Churn Count
Count of the number of times the Actors Churn state machine has entered the
ACTOR_CHURN state
Partner Churn Count
Count of the number of times the Partner Churn state machine has entered the
PARTNER_CHURN state
Sync Transition Count
Count of the number of times the Actors Mux state machine has entered the IN_SYNC state
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

513

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Partner Sync Transition Count


Count of the number of times the Partners Mux state machine has entered the IN_SYNC
state
Change Count
Count of the number of times the Actors perception of the LAG ID for this Aggregation Port
has changed
Partner Change Count
Count of the number of times the Partners perception of the LAG ID for this Aggregation Port
has changed

514

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.27 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Config

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> Configuration...

VLAN ID
The VLAN-ID or other identifier refering to this VLAN.
VLAN Type
The VLAN-type referring to this VLAN.
1. Other
2. Permanent
3. Dynamic GVRP

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

515

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.28 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Permanent Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> Add push-button...

VLAN ID [1..4096]
The VLAN-ID or other identifier refering to this VLAN.
Port Name
A unique value for each interface.
Participation
Chooses the participation for this VLAN

516

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

1. Auto
2. Included
3. Excluded
Tagging
Chooses the Tag for this VLAN
1. Tagged
2. Untagged

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

517

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.29 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push-button.

VLAN ID [1..4096]
The VLAN-ID or other identifier refering to this VLAN.
Port Name
A unique value for each interface.

518

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Participation
1. Auto
2. Included
3. Excluded
Tagging
1. Tagged
2. Untagged

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

519

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.30 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> (select an entry in the table) -> Details push-button.

VLAN ID
The VLAN-ID or other identifier referring to this VLAN.
Port Name
A unique value for each interface.
Participation
Chooses the participation for this VLAN
1. Auto
2. Included
3. Excluded
Tagging
Chooses the Tag for this VLAN
1. Tagged
2. Untagged

520

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.31 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Statistics Info

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> VLAN Statistics...

A table containing per-port, per-VLAN statistics for traffic received.


VLAN ID
The VLAN-ID or other identifier refering to this VLAN.
Frames Tx
The number of valid frames transmitted by this port to its segment from the local forwarding
process for this VLAN.
Discarted Frames Rx
The number of valid frames received by this port from its segment which were classified as
belonging to this VLAN which were discarded due to VLAN related reasons.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

521

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.32 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Info

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> Ethernet Statistics...

FILTER
Interface
Shows all Local Ports, Logical Ports and LAGs Available.
A list of Ethernet statistics entries.
Ethernet statistics Index
The value of this object uniquely identifies this etherStats entry.
Interface
This object identifies the source of the data that this etherStats entry is configured to analyze.
String with the ethernet interface on this device.
Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of
resources.
522

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Octets
The total number of octets of data received on the network.
Packets
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast
packets) received.
Broadcast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note
that this does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
CRC Align Errors
The total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and 1518 octets,
inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of
octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were otherwise
well formed.
Oversize Packets
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and were otherwise
well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either a
bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and had either a bad
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS
with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

523

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.33 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> (select an item in the table) -> Details push-button..

Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of
resources.
Octets
The total number of octets of data received on the network.
Packets
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast
packets) received.
Broadcast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note
that this does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.

524

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

CRC Align Errors


The total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and 1518 octets,
inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of
octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were otherwise
well formed.
Oversize
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and were otherwise
well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either a
bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and had either a bad
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS
with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

525

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.34 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Config

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> History Control...

History Control Index


An index that uniquely identifies an entry in the historyControl table.
Interface
This object identifies the source of the data for which historical data was collected and placed
in a media-specific table on behalf of this historyControlEntry.
This source can be any ethernet interface on this device.
Buckets Requested [1..65535]
The requested number of discrete time intervals over which data is to be saved in the part of
the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Buckets Granted
The number of discrete sampling intervals over which data shall be saved in the part of the
media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Interval [1..3600 s]
The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled for each bucket in the part of the
media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Range: 1..3600

526

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Status
The status of this historyControl entry.
1: Valid
2: Under Creation

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

527

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.35 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> (select an entry in the table) -> Add push-button..

History Control Index


An index that uniquely identifies an entry in the historyControl table.
Interface
This object identifies the source of the data for which historical data was collected and placed
in a media-specific table on behalf of this historyControlEntry.
Shows all ethernet interfaces on this device.
Buckets Requested [1..65535]
The requested number of discrete time intervals over which data is to be saved in the part of
the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Interval [1..3600 s]
The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled for each bucket in the part of the
media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Range: 1..3600

528

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.36 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Ethernet Statistics Info

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> History Ethernet Statistics...

FILTER
Interface
Shows all ethernet interfaces on this device.
History Control Index
Shows all History Control Indexes Available.
This Index uniquely identifies an entry in the historyControl table.
Interval (s) [1..3600 s]
Shows Time Intervals for Filtration.
The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled for each bucket in the part of the
media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Range [1..3600 (1 hour)]
History Control Index
The history identified by a particular value of this index is the same history as identified by
the same value of historyControlIndex.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

529

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Interface
This object identifies the source of the data for which historical data was collected and placed
in a media-specific table on behalf of this historyControlEntry.
Shows all ethernet interfaces on this device.
Sample Index
An index that uniquely identifies the particular sample this entry represents among all
samples associated with the same historyControlEntry.
Time of Started Interval
The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured.
Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of
resources during this sampling interval.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Packets
The number of packets (including bad packets) received during this sampling interval.
Broadcast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to the
broadcast address.
Multicast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to a
multicast address.
CRC Align Errors
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that had a length (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets) between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a
bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets
long (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Packets
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwise well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64
octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) had either a bad Frame

530

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame Check
Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Collisions
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment during this
sampling interval.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

531

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

37.37 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card:
Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> (select an entry in the table) -> Details pushbutton...

History Control Index


The history identified by a particular value of this index is the same history as identified by the
same value of historyControlIndex.
Time of Started Interval
The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured.
Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of
resources during this sampling interval.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
532

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Packets
The number of packets (including bad packets) received during this sampling interval.
Broadcast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to the
broadcast address.
Multicast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to a
multicast address.
CRC Align Errors
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that had a length (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets) between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either
a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets
long (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Packets
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwise well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64
octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) had either a bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame Check
Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Collisions
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment during this
sampling interval.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

533

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

38 RPR
38.1 RPR Switch Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a PF2G5
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR Switch -> Configuration...

L2 Switch tab:
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
RPR Node ID [0..63]
Enter the RPR node ID.
Protection Wait to Restore Time [1s..300s]
Enter the Wait to Restore Time.
Protection Hold Off Time [0..2000 x 10ms]
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

535

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Enter the Protection Hold Off Time.

Permanent MACs tab:


Filter
Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.

In the table, you can add a new, or delete an existing list entry.

Learned MACs tab:


Life Time Value [Disabled, 2..1440 min]
Enter the life time value or disable the life time restriction.
Filter
Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.
Select CUG ID [0..4095]
Select the CUG ID, or request the learned MAC entries.

The table shows the permanent MACs. You can copy to permanent MAC or delete an
existing list entry.

Topology tab:
Filter
Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.
Ring Not Closed
Informs you about the ring configuration.

The table shows the learned MACs.

Card Release tab:


Card Release Switch
Values: Cleared, Forced Switch, Lockout.
Card Release State
Shows the current card state.

536

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

How to Configure RPR Protection


Copy to Permanent MACs

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

537

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

38.2 RPR Ring Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an PF2G5
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR 3 oclock or 9 oclock -> Performance -> RPR
Ring...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

If the checkbox is cleared:


The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained

538

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display

Meaning

Date

Date of the current interval.

Time

Time of the current interval.

TMP

Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

Stream Frames Rx

Number of received stream frames.

Best Effort Frames Rx

Number of received best effort frames.

Dropped Frames Rx

Number of dropped frames in the received signal.

Throughput Stream
Frames Rx [byte]

Throughput of received stream frames.

Throughput Best Effort


Frames Rx [byte]

Throughput of received best effort frames.

Average Throughput
Stream Rx [bytes/s]

Average number of received bytes per second..

Average Throughput
Best Effort Rx [bytes/s]

Average number of received bytes per second..

Layer

Threshold

VC4

30% (2400 BBE/s)

STM-4 RS-Layer

50% (4000 BBE/s)

STM-4 MS-Layer

30% (9600 BBE/s or 2400 BBE/s for each channel)

Previous 15 min tab:


Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

539

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic

540

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

38.3 RPR Feeder Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an PF2G5
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> LP #n -> Performance -> RPR Feeder...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

541

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

If the checkbox is cleared:


The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display

Meaning

Date

Date of the current interval.

Time

Time of the current interval.

TMP

Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

Broadcast Frames Rx

Number of received broadcast frames.

Broadcast Frames Tx

Number of transmitted broadcast frames.

Multicast Frames Rx

Number of received multicast frames.

Multicast Frames Tx

Number of transmitted multicast frames.

Unicast Frames Rx

Number of received unicast frames.

Unicast Frames Tx

Number of transmitted unicast frames.

Lost Frames Ingress Stream


Queue Overflow Rx

Number of receiving overflow conditions.

Lost Frames Egress Stream


Queue Overflow Tx

Number of transmitting overflow conditions.

Lost Frames Ingress Best Effort Number of receiving overflow conditions.


Queue Overflow Rx
Dropped Frames Rx

Number of dropped frames in the received signal.

Total Throughput Rx [bytes]

Total number of received bytes.

Total Throughput Tx [bytes]

Total number of transmitted bytes.

Average Throughput Rx
[bytes/s]

Average number of received bytes per second..

542

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Average Throughput Tx [byte/s] Average number of transmitted bytes per second.

Previous 15 min tab:


Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

543

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

38.4 Adding a Permanent Entry

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a PF2G5
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR Switch -> Configuration... tab: Permanent MACs > Add...

CUG ID [0..4095]
Allows to select the CUG ID.
Port ID [1..4]
Allows to select the Port ID.
Node ID [0..63]
Allows to select the Node ID.
MAC Address
Allows to enter the unique MAC address.

544

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

39 Security
39.1 Access Information

This window is accessible via its toolbar button

The window shows the actual access right.

You:
The NSAP of the element manager, which currently owns the "write access".
Nobody:
If the element manager which currently owns the "write access" is connected via F interface,
"F-interface" is shown.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

545

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

39.2 NMS NE Password

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Security -> Change Password...

The NE stores 3 individual passwords for the operating systems:


OS, LCT and NCT.
Each system can change its assigned password, i.e. OS can change only the OS password in
the NE, LCT can only change LCT password and NCT can only change the NCT password in
the NE. In addition, every operating system can reset the other passwords inside the NE to
the default password.
For all OS, LCT and NCT the default password is: NEPASSWORD
As usual, when changing the current password, the operator must enter the current password
and type the new password twice.
Password build rule:
The password must have 8 ASCII printable characters at minimum and 15 at maximum.
Independently if it is successful or not, each attempt to connect and to change a password will
be written into the Activity Log. This Activity Log can be requested by the operator.

Note:
When changing the OS (NMS) password via the LCT, the operator has to update the new
password manually in the DCN properties of the Network Element Controller (NEC).
If this is not done, any new initialization of NEC will fail.

546

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

39.3 Change Password to Default

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Security -> Change Password... -> Default...

Before setting a password to default, the current NMS NE password must be entered.
The available setting options depend on the NE control mode (LCT, NCT or OS).
For all OS, LCT and NCT the default password is: NEPASSWORD

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

547

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

40 Software
40.1 Software Management

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Software Management...

This window displays information about the active APS and the inactive APS and offers
software download functions.

Active APS:
Order Number
Identifies a delivered NE software version.
SW/FW Code
Identifies a delivered NE software version.
APS Record...
Opens the Active APS Record window.
Active APS Compatibility...
Opens the APS Compatibility Information window.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

549

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Inactive APS:
Load State

Load State

Description

Not loaded

No valid inactive APS is stored persistently in the NE,


and the software storage medium is not prepared for software download

Being loaded

Software download in progress

Loaded

A complete inactive APS is stored persistently in the NE

Being initialized

The software storage medium is being prepared for software download

Initialized

The software storage medium is prepared for software download

Order Number
Displays the order number of the inactive APS.
SW/FW Code
Displays the SW/FW code of the inactive APS.
Download... / Delta Download...
Opens a MS Windows standard File Open dialog for APS file selection.
Clicking Open opens the Software Download window.
If the download was successful and the load state is initialized, click Swap APS to set the
inactive APS to active
Swap APS
With the Swap APS button, a shutdown is automatically executed and a NE startup is
induced, using the previous inactive APS. If errors occur during a very early phase of the
startup, the NE startup is interrupted and a second reset is performed to revert the previous
APS.
After a successful swap, the previous APS becomes the inactive APS and vice versa.

550

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

40.2 Software Download

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Software Management... -> Download... -> (in the opened window, select the relevant file) > Open.

This window displays APS information and allows to control and monitor the software
download process.

By pressing the Start button, the download process begins.


By pressing the Stop button, the download process can be terminated.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

551

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

40.3 Delta Software Download

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Software Management... -> Delta Download... -> (in the opened window, select the relevant
file) -> Open.

This window displays APS information and allows to control and monitor the delta software
download process.

By pressing the Start button, the download process begins.


By pressing the Stop button, the download process can be terminated.

552

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

40.4 Active APS Record

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Software Management... -> APS Record...

This window displays details of the active APS record.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

553

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

40.5 APS Compatibility Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol > Software Management... -> Active APS Compatibility...

This window displays the contents of the HW/SW compatibility of the active APS (Application
Program System) object in a tree structure.

554

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

41 Fault Clearance
41.1 NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to the NE, Subrack and Microshelf can occur:

Alarm name: "2nd Power Supply"


Second Power Supply failed.
1. Check the Power Supply connections and configuration.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Internal LAN Failed"


Internal LAN failed.
1. Check LAN connections and configuration.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Loss of Communication Between NE and Management System"


Q-interface link interrupted.
1. Check connection with Q connector
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

555

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

2. If the alarm persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm Name "Telemetry Interface n"


see TIF Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance


Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance

556

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

41.2 Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance


This help page applies to the following SURPASS hiT 7070 cards:

IFO155M

IFQ622M

IFS2G5

IFS2G5B

IFQ2G5

IFQ2G5B

IFS10G

IFS10GB

IFS10G-M

IFS10G-R

IFS10G-WLS

IFQGBE

IFQBEB

IFOFE

IFS40G-MX

IFSOA

IFSOA-PDC

IFSOB

IFSOB-PDC

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to an optical interface card can occur:

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

557

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Alarm name: "Major"


HW or SW alarm of the card.
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0"


1. To clock failure.
2. Check the timing input.
3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0X"


1. T0X clock set failure.
2. Check the timing input.
3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0Y"


1. T0Y clock set failure.
558

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

2. Check the timing input.


3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "ISTM Xn" or "ISTM Yn" or ISTM #n


Backplane signal failed.
1. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Card Unavailable"


Card unavailable.
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Port Absent"


The port module is missing.
1. Insert a port module of correct type.
2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Port Mismatch"


The used port module type does not match the card interface.
1. Replace the port module by the correct type.
2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance


NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

559

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance


Fan Unit Fault Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance

560

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

41.3 Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance


This help page applies to the following SURPASS hiT 7070 cards:

IF2M

IF345M

IFO155M-E

IFQGBE-E

IFQGBEB-E

IFOFE-E

IFOFES-E

IFOFGE-E

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to an electrical interface card can occur:

Alarm name: "Major"


HW or SW alarm of the card.
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

561

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.


4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0"


Internal NE system clock failed.
1. Be sure to use the correct timing configuration.
2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
5. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "ISTM Xn" or "ISTM Yn" or ISTM #n


Backplane signal failed.
1. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service..

Alarm name: "Card Unavailable"


Card failed.
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "LSU n Missing" (only with IF2M cards)


Line Switching Unit missing.
1. Check the dedicated LSU.
2. Extract the IF2M card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
3. If the alarm persists, replace the LSU / IF2M card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Protection Shelf Failed" (only with IFO155M-E)


562

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Protection Shelf failed.


1. Check the connections and the configuration.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "2nd Power Supply" (only with IFO155M-E)


Second Power Supply failed.
1. Check the Power Supply connections and configuration.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Internal LAN Failed" (only with IFO155M-E)


Internal LAN failed.
1. Check LAN connections and configuration.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "PLC" (only with IFOFES-E)


Partial Loss of Capacity.
1. Check the configuration, whats the minimum capacity (Mbit/s) of an LCAS group. If
there is a VC12-5v (5x 2.1 Mbit = 10.5 Mbit) and the threshold is set at 7, then the alarm
rises, when 2 VC12 have failed. This alarm occurs for Rx (PLCR), if received VCs are
failed, and Tx (PLCT), if the sent VCs are not present at the partner side. Even a wrong
(too high adjusted) PLC threshold has to be considered.
2. Check whether TTI informations for VCs are present.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "TLC" (only with IFOFES-E)


Total Loss of Capacity
1. Check if all VCs of an LCAS group are failed. This alarm occurs also for Rx (TLCR) and
Tx (TLCT).
2. Check whether TTI informations for VCs are present.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

563

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Alarm name: "FELNE" (only with IFOFES-E)


FarEndLCAS not enabled. One side is configured with LCAS, and the other not (only VC
groups).
1. Check if both sides are configured in the same way, especially that in both sides LCAS
is configured.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3.

If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "FOPR" (only with IFOFES-E)


Failure of Protocol. The LCAS protocol has CRC errors.
1. Check if there is a degraded SDH link.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "MND" (only with IFOFES-E)


Member Not Detectable. Several VCs of the LCAS group are not detectable or the delay
between each other is too great.
1. Check if all members of the LCAS-group have not more than 45 ms differential delay.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name:"SQM" (only with IFOFES-E)


Sequence mismatch. The number of the VCs inside of the LCAS group is inconsistent.
1. Check if both sides are configured in the same way.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

564

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance


NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

565

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

41.4 Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance


This help page applies to the following SURPASS hiT 7070 cards:

PF2G5

SF2G5

SF10G

SF160G

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to a switch fabric card can occur:

Alarm name: "Major"


HW or SW alarm of the card.
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

566

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Alarm name: "T0"


1. To clock failure.
2. Check the timing input.
3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0X"


1. T0X clock set failure.
2. Check the timing input.
3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0Y"


1. T0Y clock set failure.
2. Check the timing input.
3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.n

Alarm name: "Failuer of ISTM Xn" or "Failure of ISTM Yn"


Backplane signal failed.
1. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Failure of Internal Traffic Signal n"


Failure of Internal Traffic Signal.
1. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Card Unavailable"


Card unavailable.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

567

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.


2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance


Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance

568

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

41.5 SCOH and CLU Card Fault Clearance

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to the SCOH and CLU cards can occur:

Alarm name: "EOW Unavailable"


EOW failed.
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Fan Failure"


Both fan units missing or at least two fans failed.
1. Replace the fan unit immediately.
2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

569

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Alarm names: "Fan Unit 1 Failure", "Fan Unit 2 Failure"


One fan failed or at low speed.
1. Replace the fan unit soon.
2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Flash SW"


Flash SW failed.
For more information, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH
1. In case of a single Flash SW alarm, configure "Set to Idle" and "Set to Active".
2. If the alarm still persists, replace the defective MMC.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Major"


HW or SW alarm of the SCOH card.
1. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0"


T0 clock failure.
1. Check the timing input.
2. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0X"


T0X clock set failure.
1. Check the timing input.
2. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0Y"


T0Y clock set failure.
1. Check the timing input.
570

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

2. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.


3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "ULED Fail"


LED supply voltage (generated by SCOH for all cards) failed.
1. Replace the SCOH card.
2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Card Unavailable"


SCOH card unavailable.
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance


Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
NE and Subrack Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

571

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

41.6 TIF Fault Clearance

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to the TIF interface can occur:

As a basic principle, TIF alarms relate to faults that are not in the home NE.

SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance


NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance

572

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

41.7 Fan Unit Fault Clearance

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The red fault LED indicates at least one fan is at low speed or failed.

Alarm name: "Fan Failure"


At least one fan is at low speed or failed.
1. Replace the fan unit according to the alarm types: "Fan Failure" and "Fan Unit 1/2
Failure",
see SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance
2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance


Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

573

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

42 How to... (General Tasks)


42.1 How to Configure NSAP Settings

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. n the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Stack
Parameters -> Configuration
3. In the Stack Parameters Config window, Layer 3 (NSAP) field, you can change the
address settings, see MCF Stack Parameters Configuration.

Note:
The NSAP settings have critical influence on the entire network configuration and must not be
changed without prior agreement of the network administrator.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

575

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

42.2 How to Configure the Subrack Equipping

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct
Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the slot number symbol where you want to change the NE
equipment. A submenu appears, displaying all possible card types of this slot.
3. Click the required card type and configure the ports, if applicable. The card symbol of
the selected card type is added to the Module View.
4. For further configurations, right-click the card symbol, and on the submenu, click
Configuration.

How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports


SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack

576

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

42.3 How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards

Configuring a traffic card:


1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct
Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click a slot number symbol.
3. Select a card from the context menu.
4. Select the Provisioning Modes, separately for each port if applicable.
5. Click Apply.
The card will be added to the required equipping.
6. You can change the Provisioning Modes later on via the context menu of the card ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
7. For further configurations, use the context menus of the card symbol and of the
associated symbol(s) in the port list (appearing when the card symbol is clicked).

Removing a traffic card from the required equipping:


1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct
Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the slot number symbol.
3. Select Empty or Empty-Auto (or another card type) from the context menu.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

577

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

42.4 How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports

1. In the Module View, right-click a PDH or SDH interface card symbol -> Configuration ->
Port Provisioning...
2. A Port Provisioning Config window opens.
(An equivalent Card Equipment Config window opens automatically when a slot is newly
equipped with a SDH interface card.)
3. Select Empty for every unused port.
4. Select Working or one of the offered protection schemes for every used port.
5. In protection case, the involved partner slots are displayed. Be sure that they are
equipped with the same card type and configured properly.
6. Click Apply.

How to Configure the Subrack Equipping

578

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

42.5 How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object
to Object

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct
Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click the symbol an interface card or packet switch fabric card.
3. In the port list, select a port symbol -> right-click Subview -> traffic symbol -> Copy
Data...
(or repeatedly Subview -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data..., if applicable)
4. In the Copy Data window, Copy Items area, set the checkbox(es) of the configuration(s)
you want to copy,
or click All Items to copy all configurations shown in the list.
5. In the Copy Units area, the Source field displays the source slot number and card name.
6. In the Targets field, the slot numbers of the possible targets are displayed.
7. Select the target(s) to where you want to copy the configuration settings.
To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to
select all entries in the list.
8. Click Apply. The selected configuration of the source card is copied to the card/cards
selected in the Targets field.

Note:
Copy Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied
because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).

How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

579

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

42.6 How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object

1. In the Module View, right-click a suitable card symbol -> Copy Card Data...
2. In the Copy Card Data window , the Source field displays the source slot number and
card name.
3. In the Targets field, the slot numbers for the possible targets are displayed.
4. Select the target to where you want to copy the configuration settings or click All Targets
to select all entries in the list.
5. Click Apply. The selected configuration of the source card is copied to the card/cards
selected in the Targets field.

Note:
Copy Card Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be
copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).

How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object

580

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

42.7 How to Configure ETH Cards and Debugging

Configuring ETH cards:


1. Set the dedicated MUX structure (only IFOFES-E):
Select the card -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview -> VC4
-> Configuration -> Mux Preparation.
2. Set the concatenation (only IFOFES-E):
Select the card -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
3. Select a template (not with IFOFES-E):
You should think before, which VCs (capacity) are being used and then set a template,
cause a belated modification is only possible with traffic interruption of all ports.
Select the card -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
Note: Adjacent VC4-4v can be changed over, via "Modify Template", to VC4-2v.. VC46v. The total sum must be always 8 VC4.
4. Setting of Bandwidth and Subchanneling:
Select the card -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.
5. Switching the VCs:
E.g. for a VC12-5v, 3 VC12 are switched via one SDH card/port and the other 2 VC12
via another SDH card/port. Therefore, not a VC12-5v must be selected, but the
particular VC12s in the cross connection window.
6. Concerning LCAS:
For all involved VCs, LCAS must be activated.

ETH traffic is not running:


1. Is the ETH link o.k.?
Check the ETH Configuration window.
2. Check the "Signal Label" and the "TTI" with the VC4 Configuration window.
When virtual concatenation is configured, check all single VCs (if o.k. the SDH
connection is sure).
3. Both partners must have the same subchanneling entries (on or off). See GFP
Assignment window.
4. If subchanneling is configured, check that channel ID is identical with both partners.
5. Are VCAT groups at both partners configured the same way (both with LCAS activated
or not; no mixed way)?
6. With the Ethernet Packet Performance window, you can see, wether port traffic is
coming/going (Rx/Tx). If all is dropped at Tx, then probably the subchanneling or the
subchannel ID is wrong configured (Sink and Source port is not the same).

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

581

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

43 How to... (Timing)


43.1 How to Configure the Timing

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> SEC...


T0:
2. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window , right-click the T0 symbol ->
Configuration...
3. Select the Requested Timing Source for T0:
T1 (STM signals), T3 (external clock input), Auto Selection (depending of the quality of
the available clock pulses) or Free Running (in case no clock input is available).
- Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received
quality levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections.
- Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not
override the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.
4. Click Apply. Click Close.
T1:
5. If a T1 timing source is used, right-click the T1 symbol -> Configuration...
In the T1 Config window, Timing References tab, select the card(s) and port(s) used as
timing references.
6. Click Apply. Click Close.
T3:
7. If a T3 timing source is used, right-click the T3 symbol -> Configuration...
In the T3/T4 Config window, select the T3 mode and SSM settings (quality information
about the used clock pulse, transmitted in the MSOH of the STM-n signal)
8. Click Apply. Click Close.
9. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, SA-Bit selection field next to the T3
symbol, select the SA bit(s) to be used with T3.
10. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, T0 Prio column, right-click the yellow field
next to each used T1 or T3 timing source and define a priority relating to the T0 system
clock selection.
11. You can lock out each T1 and T3 timing source (so that it is generally not available as a
synchronization reference) by clicking the green hook next to the T0 Prio field. A red
cross will appear indicating the lockout state of this timing source.
To reset the lockout state, click the red cross.
T4:
12. Right-click the T4 symbol -> Configuration...
13. In the T3/T4 Config window, select the Requested Timing Source for T4, the T4 Mode,
and the Minimum Quality Threshold for T4.
14. Click Apply. Click Close.
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

583

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

15. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, T4 Prio column, right-click the yellow field
next to each used T1 timing source, and define a priority relating to the T4 clock output
selection.
16. In the SA-Bit selection field next to the T4 symbol, select the SA bit to be used with T4.
17. In the left-hand bottom part of the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, you can
enable the Use of SSM for Selection and you can select the Wait to Restore (WTR)
Time.
18. Click Apply. Click Close.

584

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

43.2 How to Set Sync Priorities

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> SEC...)


2. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, right-click the T0 Prio or T4 Prio field of
the concerned T1 or T3 clock, select the priority (1 = highest) or "do not use".
If the selected priority number is not unique within T0 Prio or T4 Prio, the system will
change the other priorities automatically.
3. Click Apply.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

585

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

44 How to... (Alarms)


44.1 How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Option Settings button.

2. In the Option Settings window, select the Alarm Severity Threshold to be displayed.
No alarms with lower priority will be displayed.
3. If the Alarm Flash checkbox in the General field is disabled, an alarm is indicated by
highlighting the concerned symbol(s) permanently red, instead of flashing red.
4. Click OK.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

587

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

44.2 How to Suppress Alarms

Suppressing Equipment or SEC Alarms


1. In the Module View, right-click the relevant symbol -> Fault -> Equipment Alarms... or
SEC Alarms...
(In case of an already raised alarm, the concerned symbols are highlighted red or
flashing red.).
2. In the Alarm window, set the Suppression checkbox of the alarm(s).
Raised alarms are displayed at the top of the list.
3. Click Apply.

Suppressing Communication Alarms


1. In the Module View, click the relevant card symbol.
(In case of an already raised alarm, the concerned symbols are highlighted red or
flashing red.).
2. In the traffic view, right-click the card symbol -> Subview... -> STM-n or En-> Fault ->
Communication Alarms...
3. In the Alarm window, set the Suppression checkbox of the alarm(s).
4. Click Apply.

588

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

44.3 How to Configure TIF Ports

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Configuration -> TIF...
2. In the NE - TIF #n Config window, enter an individual name and select the Closed or
Open input polarity for each used TIF port.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

589

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

45 How to... (Cross Connections)


45.1 How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Filter Options

Setting cross connection filter options:


1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, Filter area, use the selection fields to select the
filtering features.
3. Click Set Filter to activate your filter settings. The table shows the available cross
connections depending on your filter settings.

Clearing all cross connection filter settings:


1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Reset Filter. The selection field settings
change to All.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

591

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

45.2 How to Create a Cross Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...


3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the CC Type, VC Level and Concatenation
Counter N value (if applicable).
TP A:
4. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.
5. Click the button "To TPA >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
TP B:
6. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.
7. Click the button "To TPB >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
8. If no TP B termination point is required, proceed with step #12.
TP B:
9. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as TP B cross
connection end point.
(The TP B selections depend on the selected CC Type.)
10. Click the button "To TPB' >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B' entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
11. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
12. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
In the TP Selection list, the involved TPs are marked by asterisks.
13. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

592

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

45.3 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.


.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC12 VC Level.
4. The SDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).
5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.
6. Click the button "To TPA >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.
8. Click the button "To TPB >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
9. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 7 and 8 with TPB'.
10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

593

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

45.4 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.


.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC3 VC Level.
4. The SDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).
5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.
6. Click the button "To TPA >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.
8. Click the button "To TPB >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
9. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 7 and 8 with TPB'.
10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

594

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

45.5 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.


.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC4 VC Level.
4. The SDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).
5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.
6. Click the button "To TPA >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.
8. Click the button "To TPB >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
9. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 7 and 8 with TPB'.
10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
1. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

595

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

45.6 How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12/VC3 Cross Connection

1. Before a VC12 cross connection on the ETH card could be done, the multiplex structure
on the ETH card must be changed to VC12.
2. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.
.
3. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the connection type.
5. Select the VC12/VC3 connection layer.
6. Select an SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection field.
7. Select an Ethernet card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection
field.
8. The SDH and Ethernet card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (>Close).
9. Select the applicable TP indexes.
Attention: On the TP, which relates to the ETH card, the LCT offers always all possible
TP indexes of the VC level (i.e. 3x VC3 and 63x VC12).
10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
12. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the filter settings).
13. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

596

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

45.7 How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an


RPR

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.


.
2. You can identify the TP allocation (tributary or ring side) via the GFP Assignment
window (-> Close).
3. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC Level.
5. In the TP Selection area, select an Ethernet Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.
6. Click the button "To TPA >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
7. In the TP Selection area, select the PF2G5 card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.
8. Click the button "To TPB >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
9. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
10. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
11. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

597

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

45.8 How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection

1. Only in case of using a microshelf:


Make sure that a LNQ622 and a Switch Fabric card are additionally installed in subrack
1.
2. In the tool bar, click the Cross Connection List button.
.
3. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC12 LC Layer.
5. The SDH and PDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (->
Close).
6. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.
7. Click the button "To TPA >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
8. In the TP Selection area, select the LNQ622M card or an IF2M / IF345M card
respectively, and select the VC number you want as cross connection end point.
9. Click the button "To TPB >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
10. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 8 and 9 with TPB'.
11. The SDH card classification can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).
12. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
13. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
14. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

598

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

45.9 How to Add and Remove Path Protections

Adding a path protection:


1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, select an unprotected cross connection.


Click Details...
3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection in the list.
Click Modify...
4. In the Modify Cross Connection window, CC Type field, select the equivalent protected
cross connection type.
5. In the TP Selection field, select the Card and the VC number you want as protection end
point.
6. Click Add Protection.

Removing a path protection:


1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the cross connection.


Click Details...
3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection in the list.
Click Modify...
4. Click Remove Work. Path or Remove Prot Path.
5. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
The selected cross connection remains connected, but becomes unprotected.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

599

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

45.10 How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...


3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprotected CC Type.
4. Select the VC Level.
5. Line West: Select a card and a TP in the TP Selection area.
Click the button "To TPA >>".
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
6. Line East: Select a card and a TP in the TP Selection area.
Click the button "To TPB >>".
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
7. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
8. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
9. Select the Unidirectional Tail End CC Type.
10. In the TP Selection area, select the same settings as in step 5.
Click the button "To TPB >>".
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
11. In the TP Selection area, select the same settings as in step 6.
Click the button "To TPB' >>".
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
12. Tributary: Select a card and a TP in the TP Selection area.
Click the button "To TPA >>".
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
13. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
14. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
15. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

600

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

45.11 How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...


3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprotected CC Type.
4. Select the VC Level.
5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point
6. Click the button "To TPA >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point
8. Click the button "To TPB >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
9. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
10. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
11. Repeat the steps 5 to 10 depending on the required number of branches, with the same
card A and TP a settings.
12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

601

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

45.12 How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button

2. In the Cross Connections List window, find one branch of the existing broadcast cross
connection in the list.
3. Click Add...
4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprotected CC Type.
5. Select the same VC Level as the existing branches have.
6. Select the same card A and TP A as the existing branches have.
Click To TP A >>.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
7. Select card B and TP B in the TP Selection field.
Click To TP B >>.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
8. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
9. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
10. You can display a graphic of all created cross connections by clicking
Graphic..
11. You can display a graphic of the TP relations of a selected cross connection by clicking
Details... (select the list entry) -> Graphic Details ...

602

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

45.13 How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button

2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the branch of the broadcast cross
connection.
3. Click Delete.
4. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
5. If the following message is displayed, confirm it: "The VC4 Path Cross Connection is
used in at least one combined Low Order Cross Connection".
It is displayed when more than one lower order cross connections use a higher order
cross connection. In this case, the higher order cross connection can only be deleted
after having deleted the last lower order cross connection.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

603

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

45.14 How to Disconnect a Cross Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button

2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the cross connection to be disconnected.
3. Click Disconnect.
4. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
5. If the following message is displayed, confirm it: "The VC4 Path Cross Connection is
used in at least one combined Low Order Cross Connection".
It is displayed when more than one lower order cross connections use a higher order
cross connection. In this case, the higher order cross connection can only be
disconnected after having disconnected the last lower order cross connection.

604

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

45.15 How to Configure DCC Cross Connections

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC ->
Configuration...
3. In the MCF - DCC Config window, DCC List, right-click the DCC channel you want to
configure.
4. On the submenu, click Configuration... to open the DCC Linkage Configuration window.
5. In this window, make the relevant settings.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

605

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

46 How to... (OH Cross Connections)


46.1 How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection Filter Options

Setting OH cross connection filter options:


1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...
3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, in the Filter field of either tab, use the
selection fields to select the filtering features.
4. Click Set Filter to activate your filter settings. The table shows the available cross
connections depending on your filter settings.

Clearing all OH cross connection filter settings:


1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...
3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, click Reset Filter. The selection field
settings change to All.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

607

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

46.2 How to Create an OH Cross Connection

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...
3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, OH TP List tab, OH Termination Point list,
select the entry you want as OH cross connection start point.
4. Click Set as TP A. The selected OH cross connection start point appears in the New OH
Cross Connection area as TP A entry.
5. In the list, select the entry you want as OH cross connection end point.
6. Click Set as TP B. The selected OH Cross Connection end point appears in the New OH
Cross Connection area as TP B entry. The corresponding OH CC Type is displayed.
7. Click Connect.

608

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

46.3 How to Disconnect an OH Cross Connection

8. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
1. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...
2. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, OH CC List tab, select the OH cross
connection you want to disconnect. The selected OH cross connection is displayed in
detail in the OH CC Options area.
3. Click Disconnect.
4. Confirm the acknowledgement window.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

609

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

47 How to... (Protections)


47.1 How to Create / Delete a 1+1 MSP Line Protection

Creating a 1+1 MSP Protection:


1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the protecting SDH interface card symbol ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
Select Linear 1+1 MSP (Protection) for the port(s) of the card.
If the partner slot has been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, it will be configured
automatically.
Click Apply.
3. To create the protection, right-click the card symbol. On the submenu, click Protection.
4. In the Protection Management window , select the respective 1+1 MSP in the list, and
click Create.
The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).
5. In the port list, right-click the port symbol -> Subview...
6. In the 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow window, right-click the 1+1 MSP symbol -> Configuration.
7. In the 1+1 MSP Config window, MSP Activation field, select Activated and click Apply.
The 1+1 MSP protection is active.

Deleting a 1+1 MSP Protection:


1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click one of the card symbols involved in the 1+1 MSP protection.
3. In the port list, right-click the port symbol -> Subview...
4. In the 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow window, right-click the 1+1 MSP symbol -> Configuration...
5. In the 1+1 MSP Config window, MSP Activation field, select De-activated and click
Apply. Confirm the warning message.
6. In the top segment of the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols ->
Protection...
7. In the Protection Management window , select the 1+1 MSP to be deleted and click
Delete.
8. To remove the protection completely, click theinvolved protecting card symbol ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.
9. Click Apply.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

611

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

47.2 How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

Creating a 2F Shared Ring Protection (example IF2G5 card):


1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, configure an IFS2G5, card in one of the involved slots and select
the 2F Shared Ring provisioning mode.
If the partner slot has been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, it will be configured
automatically.
3. Right-click one of the involved card symbols and select Protection...
4. In the Protection Management list, select the 2F-SPRING and click Create.
The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).
5. To activate the 2F Shared Ring Protection:
In the port list, right-click the port symbol with Provisioning Mode "2F Shared Ring..." ->
Subview... -> 2F-SPRING -> Configuration...
6. Configure the ring topology with a minimum of 3 nodes. Each node ID should be unique.
7. In the 2F SPRING Configuration window, select "Activated" in the MSP Activation field.
8. Click Apply.

Deleting a 2F Shared Ring Protection:


1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the 2F SPRING Configuration window, set the MSP Activation to "De-activated".
3. In the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols -> Protection...
4. In the Protection Management window , select the 2F-SPRING to be deleted and click
Delete.
5. To remove the protection completely, click the involved protecting card symbol ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.
6. Click Apply.

612

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

47.3 How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

Creating a 4F Shared Ring Protection:


1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, configure an IFS2G5 type, IFQ2G5 type or IFS10G type card in one
of the involved slots and select the 4F Shared Ring Protection provisioning mode.
If the 3 partner slots have been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, they will be
configured automatically..
3. Right-click one of the involved card symbols and select Protection...
4. In the Protection Management list, select the 4F-SPRING and click Create.
The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).
5. To activate the 4F Shared Ring Protection:
In the port list, right-click the card symbol with ProvMode "4F Shared Ring ..." ->
Subview... -> 4F-SPRING -> Configuration.
6. Configure the ring topology with a minimum of 3 nodes. Each node ID should be unique.
7. In the 4F SPRING Configuration window, MSP Activation field, select "Activated".
8. Click Apply.

Deleting a 4F Shared Ring Protection:


1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the 4F SPRING Configuration window, set the MSP Activation to "De-activated".
3. In the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols -> Protection...
4. In the Protection Management window , select the 4F-SPRING to be deleted and click
Delete.
5. To remove the protection completely, click the involved protecting card symbol ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.
6. Click Apply.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

613

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

47.4 How to Configure the Squelch Table for 2F or 4F Rings

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click a 2.5-Gbit/s or 10-Gbit/s interface card symbol with created 2FSPRING or 4F-SPRING protection.
3. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING ->
Configuration... -> Squelch...
4. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Config window, Squelch Table area, you can assign
the required Node Ids to each AU4.
5. Click Apply.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection


How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

614

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

47.5 How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection

Creating an IF2M card protection:


1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, right-click the slot number
symbol that offers IF2M card protection, and select the IF2M (CP) card.
2. Configure the required number of IF2M cards in the working card slots.
3. Right-click each IF2M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Add to Group.
4. Right-click the IF2M (CP) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Activate.

Deleting an IF2M card protection:


1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, you can remove any
working IF2M card from the protection group by right-clicking the IF2M (W) card symbol
-> Card Protection -> Remove from Group.
2. To remove the complete protection group, right-click the IF2M (CP) card -> Card
Protection -> Remove Group.
Right-click the slot number symbol and select Empty or Empty-Auto.

Note: Avoiding IF2M Traffic loss during exchange of an IF2M card in the card protection
scheme
Before plugging a "new/replaced" card into a working slot of an existing IF2M card protection
scheme, this card needs to get "deactivated". This means the operator needs to remove this
card from the required equipping. By this the card will be switched off. A switched-off card will
not perform an optimistic startup, so this card cannot destroy traffic in a protection group. A
deactivation can be done by one of the following methods:
a) If the card has to be transferred and was already plugged into an NE, the current slot shall
be set to "empty" while the card is plugged. By this action the card gets switched off (i.e.
deactivated).
b) If the card was not plugged into an NE before (coming from the spare), it shall be put into
the respective working slot, it needs to get plugged into another free slot first, which is
configured to "empty" (not "auto-empty" !!). Also by this the card gets switched off (i.e.
deactivated).
If this is still not acceptable, then the only advise is, that the card shall not be put into the
respective working slot. Instead of this it shall be plugged in the protection slot and have it
started-up here. By this no traffic hits will occur because an optimistic startup in the protection
slot will not cause any traffic hits.
If you have to do this, please make sure that there are no faults on the Protection
group!

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

615

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card Protection

616

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

47.6 How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card Protection

Creating an IF345M card protection:


5. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, right-click a slot number
symbol that offers IF345M card protection, and select the IF345M (CP) card.
6. Configure the required IF345M card in the working card slot.
7. Right-click the IF345M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Add to Group.
8. Right-click the IF345M (CP) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Activate.

Deleting an IF345M card protection:


1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, you can remove the
working IF345M card from the protection group by right-clicking the IF345M (W) card
symbol -> Card Protection -> Remove from Group.
2. To remove the complete protection group, right-click the IF345M (CP) card -> Card
Protection -> Remove Group.
Right-click the slot number symbol and select Empty or Empty-Auto.
3.

How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

617

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

47.7 How to Create / Delete an SF2G5, SF10G or SF160G Card Protection

Creating an SF2G5 card protection:


1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, configure an SF2G5 working card in a suitable odd numbered slot.
3. Configure an SF2G5 protecting card in a suitable even numbered slot.
No further configurations are necessary.

Creating an SF10G card protection:


1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, configure an SF10G working card in a suitable odd numbered slot.
3. Configure an SF10G protecting card in a suitable even numbered slot.
No further configurations are necessary.

Creating an SF160G card protection:


1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, configure an SF160G working card in a suitable slot
(105 in the double-row subrack, 307 in the single-row subrack)
3. Configure an SF160G (CP) protecting card in a suitable slot
(107 in the double-row subrack, 308 in the single-row subrack)
No further configurations are necessary.

Deleting an SF2G5, SF10G or SF160G card protection:


1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, change the protecting slot configuration to Empty or to a working
card.

618

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

47.8 How to Configure RPR Protection

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click the PF2G5 card symbol.
3. In the port list, click the PF2G5 symbol -> Subview...
4. In the GFP Group Traffic Flow window: Right-click the RPR Switch symbol ->
Configuration...
5. In the RPR Switch Config window, L2 Switch folder, enter the RPR Node ID.
6. Enter the Protection Wait to Restore Time.
7. Enter the Protection Hold Off Time.
The Hold Off Time makes sure that the L2 protection is not triggered by a MSP, SNCP,
or RPR ring protection switching of other nodes.
8. Click Apply.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

47.9 How to Create an SNCP Protection

1. In the Module View, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...


3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Connection Type:
Bidirectional Protected or
Unidirectional Head End or
Unidirectional Tail End.
4. Select the VC Level (e.g. VC4).
TP A:
5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.
6. Click the button "To TPA >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
TP B:
7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.
8. Click the button "To TPB >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
TP B:
9. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as TP B cross
connection end point.
(The TP B selections depend on the selected CC Type.)
10. Click the button "To TPB' >>"
The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B' entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.
11. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
12. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
13. Configure the second end point in the same way, starting from step #3.
14. Configure all intermediate points in the same way, starting from step #3.
15. Click Close. - The new cross connections are displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).
16. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

620

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

47.10 How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Existing LO Path

Preparing the multiplex structure for the protecting LO path:


1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the LO SF card symbol where the multiplex structure is to
be prepared -> Subview...
3. In the Selection window, right-click the VC4 (Mux) symbol to be structured -> Subview...
4. In the Mux Structure window, right-click the VC4 symbol -> Configuration...
5. To use VC12 containers, select the Mux Config window, VC4 Mux Preparation tab,
activate the "21 x TU-12" selection box of the related TUG #n.
To use VC3 containers, no VC4 preparation is necessary on the LO sub-networks.
6. Click the Apply button.
7. If LO concatenation is to be used:
In the context menus of the LO SF, select Configuration -> Concatenation... and create
the required concatenated containers.
Creating the LO cross connection (protecting path):
1. In the Module View, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, right-click the SNCP cross connection to be
modified -> Details...
3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection and click Modify...
4. In the Modify Cross Connection window, CC Type area, select Bidirectional Protected.
5. In the TP Selection area, select the TP A to be protected.
Click the button "To TPA >>"
6. In the TP Selection area, select the LO SF card (e.g. SF2G5).
Select the LO container from the VC4 that has been structured before.
7. Click the button "To TPB' >>"
Creating the HO VC4 cross connection (protecting path):
1. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
2. In the Add Cross Connection window, CC Type, select Bidirectional Protected.
3. Select the VC Level VC4.
4. In the TP Selection area, select the LO SF card and VC4 container that have been
selected in the previous steps.
Click the button "To TPA >>"

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

621

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

5. In the TP Selection area, select the SDH card and VC4 container to be used for the
protecting path.
Click the button "To TPB >>"
6. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
7. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
8. Click Close. - The new cross connections are displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).
9. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

622

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

47.11 How to Set Up the Squelching Table

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click an interface card symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection
or 4F-SPRING protection.
3. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview...
4. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Traffic Flow window, right-click the 2F-SPRING or
4F-SPRING symbol -> Configuration...
5. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Config window, click Squelch...
6. In the Squelch Config window, assign the AU4 containers to their related NEs.

The following illustrations give an example:

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

623

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

624

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

47.12 How to Set Up a Microshelf Extension Link

1. Make sure that the internal LAN connection between the SURPASS hiT7070 SC or DC
subrack and the extension shelf is connected.
2. Make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
3. In the Module View, insert an LNQ622M card.
In the Card Equipment Config window, configure a port.
4. Right-click the NE symbol -> Configuration -> Extension Shelf...
Configure a microshelf with a suitable subrack ID according to the table in the ITMN..
5. After the LNQ622M card is started up successfully, click the LNQ622M card symbol.
6. In the port list, right-click an port symbol -> Subview...
7. In the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window, right-click the Main ISTM4 symbol
-> Configuration...
8. In the Main ISTM4 Config window, Connection Identifier field, select the corresponding
ESM card of the microshelf.
Click Apply.
9. In the upper part of the Module View, configure the second LNQ622M card.
10. In the Card Equipment Config window, active the Protection Port.
11. In the Port Provisioning window of the Protection card, select the entry Link Protection
with the number according to the actual configuration.
12. In the port list, right-click an port symbol -> Subview...
13. In the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window, right-click the Main ISTM4 symbol
-> Configuration...
14. In the Main ISTM4 Config window, Connection Identifier field, select the corresponding
ESM protection card of the microshelf.
Click Apply.
15. In the upper part of the Module View, right-click one of the LNQ622M cards symbols ->
Protection...
16. Select the entry in the list.
Click Create.
17. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview...
Now the protection group is available.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

625

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

48 How to... (Concatenations)


48.1 How to Configure SDH Concatenations

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click the SDH interface card symbol.
3. In the port list, right-click the card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
4. In the Concatenation Config window, click the Add... button.
5. In the Add Concatenation Group window, select the Concatenation Type, Group ID and
TPs, as applicable.
6. Click Apply.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

627

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

48.2 How to Configure ETH Concatenations

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
3. In the Concatenation Config window, click the Template... button.
4. In the Concatenation Group Templates window, select one of the templates.
5. Click Apply.

628

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

49 How to... (GFP Configurations)


49.1 How to Create / Delete VC Channels

Creating VC channels:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module view, right-click the PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment.
3. In the GFP Assignment window, GFP-SDH Assignment list, select the VC/VC Group for
the GFP Group.
4. Click Apply.

Deleting VC channels:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1
tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module view, right-click the PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment.
3. In the GFP Assignment window, GFP-SDH Assignment list, select the GFP Group.
4. Set the VC/VC Group to Unassigned.
5. Click Apply
Confirm the warning message.

Note:
Never delete a VC group as long as still a GFP group is assigned!

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

629

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

49.2 How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click an Ethernet or packet switch card symbol.->
Configuration -> Concatenation...
3. In the Concatenation Config window, click Template... and select one of the
Concatenation Group Templates.
Click Apply.
4. Close the Concatenation Config window.
5. In the context menu of the card, select Configuration -> GFP Assignment....
6. In the GFP Assignment window, ETH-GFP Assignment or LP Bandwidth Configuration
area (as applicable), enter the bandwidth for each GFP Group.
7. Click Apply.
Confirm the warning message.
8. In the GFP-SDH Assignment area, select the VC/VC Group assignment for each GFP
group.
9. Click Apply.
10. Connect the SDH capacity with a path through the network.
11. Upload a VCDB for the NE.

Note:
To decommission ports, unassign them from the GFP group or disconnect a cross
connection.
If you unassign the GFP-SDH assignment, the device will be reset resulting in a short payload
interruption of all channels served by the card.

630

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

49.3 How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click an Ethernet or packet switch card symbol ->
Configuration -> GFP Assignment.
3. In the GFP Assignment window, ETH-GFP Assignment area, enter the bandwidth value
for the concerned Ethernet port.
4. Click Apply. Confirm the warning message.

Note:
Check the sum of the bandwidths of all the Ethernet ports assigned to a GFP group. The sum
must be less than the SDH capacity you plan to assign to the GFP group. Exceeding the SDH
capacity may cause packet loss!

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

631

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

49.4 How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG

Creating a CUG:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment...
3. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or
LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable).
4. Click Port Config.
5. In the Config window, select Multi2 CUG Mode.
6. Move at least one CUG ID from the Possible CUG ID values list to the CUG ID list.
7. Click Apply.
Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
8. Click CUG Management.
9. In the Multi2 CUG Management Config window, click Add CUG to open the PF2G5 Add
CUG window.
10. In this window, make the relevant settings.

Modifying a CUG:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment...
3. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or
LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable).
4. Click Port Config.
5. In the Config window, select Multi2 CUG Mode.
6. Move at least one CUG ID from the Possible CUG ID values list to the CUG ID list.
7. Click Apply.
Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
8. Click CUG Management.
9. In the Multi2 CUG Management Config window, change the CUG settings.
10. Click Apply.

Deleting a CUG:
632

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment...
3. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or
LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable)..
4. Click Port Config.
5. In the Config window, select Multi2 CUG Mode.
6. Move at least one CUG ID from the Possible CUG ID values list to the CUG ID list.
7. Click Apply.
Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
8. Click CUG Management.
9. In the Multi2 CUG Management Config window, click Remove CUG.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

633

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

49.5 How to Specify the CUG Service Class

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment...
3. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or
LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable).
4. Click Port Config...
5. In the Config window, select the CUG Mode and click Apply. Confirm the warning
message.
6. Click the CUG Management button.
(for configuration details, see Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards
7. In the CUG Management Config window, Service Class field, select
Static Best Effort for fair access to the available bandwidth
or
Dynamic Prio 0 to Dynamic Prio 7: The service class of an incoming packet can be
determined dynamically based upon the VLAN tag of the packet.
8. Click Apply.

634

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

49.6 How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click a PF2G5 card symbol.
3. In the port list, right-click the PF2G5 port symbol -> Subview....
4. In the GFP Group Traffic Flow window, right-click the RPR 3 oclock or RPR 9 oclock
symbol -> Performance -> RPR Ring. The RPR Ring Performance window opens.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

635

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

49.7 How to Configure RPR Bandwidths

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment...
3. In the GFP Assignment window, LP Bandwidth Configuration or LP GFP Assignment
area (as applicable), enter the Ingress Bandwidth and / or Egress Bandwidth for each
involved LP port.
4. Click Apply.

636

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

50 How to... (Data and Software Handling)


50.1 How to Download VCDB Files

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Config DB Management...


2. Set NE State to Idle.
3. In the Config DB Action field, select Set to Default Config DB.
4. Click Download...
A standard Open dialog for VCDB file selection is opened.
5. Select the path and the file you want to download.
6. Click Open. The VCDB Download window appears.
7. Click Start to start the download. The state of the download process is displayed. After
the download process has been concluded, the window closes automatically and the
VCDB download is successfully completed.
8. If the download is not concluded successfully and an error message occurs, click Close
to close the window.
Check the reason for the error (e. g. open the Module View and check the window to
verify which setting is missing).
After removing the error, repeat the download process.
9. After successful download, the NE can be set to active. As a precondition for this, the
NE name must not be the default name. If necessary, change the NE name via the NE
symbol -> Configuration -> Network Element...
10. In the Config DB Management window, select NE Stare Active and click Apply. The NE
will be initialized automatically.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

637

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

50.2 How to Upload VCDB Files

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Config DB Management...


2. In the Config DB Management window, click Upload...
A standard File Save As dialog for VCDB file selection is opened.
3. Select the path and enter the file you want to upload.
4. Click Save. The VCDB Upload window appears.
5. Click Start to start the upload. The state of the download process is displayed. After the
upload process has been concluded, the window closes automatically and the VCDB
upload is successfully completed..

Note:
During VCDB upload, all empty slots will be set to Empty-Auto provisioning state, even if
configured to Empty before.

638

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

51 How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules)


51.1 How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH
The MMC must be exchanged in case of an Flash SW alarm at the SCOH card, see SCOH,
CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance
The replacement of a defect MMC by a new one (with no data), must be done with an
operating SCOH.
The current NE-VCDB is being copied automatically to the new MMC.
The password data, license and subrack label are not automatically transformed to the MMC.
To adopt these data to the new MMC, they must be inserted via the LCT again.
If an SCOH is replaced, the old MMC (placed at the front panel of the SCOH) must be
adopted before the new SCOH is inserted. The MMC data belongs always to the subrack!
Passwords, license and subrack label are set to default after an SCOH reboot.
Also the NE-VCDB is being lost after a Power Off (pulling out the SCOH).

Note:
The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that
battery.

For detailed flow charts, see:


How to Change a Defective SCOH
How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH
How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

639

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

51.2 How to Change a Defective SCOH


For general notes, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH.

If you replace a defective SCOH, you must follow the below flow chart.

Note:
The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that
battery.

640

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

641

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Retrieve NSAP and VCDB


Flow Chart Symbol Legend
How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH
How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC

642

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

51.3 How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC


For general notes, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH.

If you replace a defective SCOH inclusive a defective MMC, you must follow the below flow
chart.

Note:
The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that
battery.

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

643

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

644

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Retrieve NSAP and VCDB


Flow Chart Symbol Legend
How to Change a Defective SCOH
How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

645

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

51.4 How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH


For general notes, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH.

If you replace a defective MMC on a working SCOH, you must follow the below flow chart.

646

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

647

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Flow Chart Symbol Legend


How to Change a Defective SCOH
How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC

648

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

51.5 Retrieve NSAP and VCDB

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

649

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

51.6 Flow Chart Symbol Legend

650

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

52 Index
1

Alarm List ............................................... 65

1 1 MSP Configuration ......................... 157

APS Compatibility Information ............. 468

1 N MSP Alarms..................................... 80

ASIC Data Information ......................... 324

1 N MSP Configuration ........................ 159

Assigned VLAN IDs Information........... 222

1 N MSP Extension .............................. 162

AU4 PJE Performance ......................... 337

1 N MSP Protected Traffic Flow............. 99

AU4/VC4 Configuration ........................ 127

1 N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow ...... 100

Booster Cards Label Information ........... 41

2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration


......................................................... 175

C
Card Configuration for ETH Cards ......... 52

2F / 4F SPRING Topology Configuration


......................................................... 173

Card Configuration for SDH Cards......... 50

2F SPRING Configuration.................... 167

Card Equipment Configuration............... 43

2F-SPRING Extra Configuration .......... 169

Card Inventory Summary ....................... 33

Change Password to Default ............... 461

4F SPRING Configuration.................... 171

CLU Card Configuration ......................... 45

4F SPRING Traffic Flow ...................... 117

Communication Alarm Feature Table .... 73

Communication Alarms .......................... 71

Abbreviations ........................................... 1

Concatenated VC4 Configuration ........ 199

About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software ..... 11

Concatenation Configuration................ 203

Access Information .............................. 459

Concatenation Details .......................... 205

Active APS Record .............................. 467

Concatenation Group Templates ......... 207

Actual Equipping Information ................. 32

Copy Card Data.................................... 327

Add 1 N MSP ....................................... 161

Copy Data ............................................ 325

Add Concatenation Group ................... 206

Copy to Permanent MACs ................... 333

Add Cross Connection ......................... 145

Cross Connection Details..................... 147

Add Extension Link Protection ............. 189

Cross Connection Graphic Details ....... 149

Add VLAN ID Assignment.................... 223

Cross Connections Graphic ................. 148

Add Working Ports ............................... 163

Cross Connections List ........................ 141

Adding a Permanent Entry................... 458

Adding a Reachable DCC Address...... 269

Date / Time Configuration ...................... 13

Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address 276

DB Download Dialog ............................ 329

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

651

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

DB Management Configuration............ 328

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
How to Add and Remove Path Protections
......................................................... 507

DB Upload Dialog................................. 330


Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC
Connections..................................... 271

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups


......................................................... 536

Delta Software Download .................... 466

How to Change a Defective MMC on a


Working SCOH ................................ 552

How to Change a Defective SCOH ...... 546

E12 Configuration ................................ 135

How to Change a Defective SCOH


inclusive a Defective MMC .............. 549

E12 or E3 Traffic Flow ........................... 93


E3 Configuration .................................. 137
E3/VC3 Alarms....................................... 78
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
......................................................... 473
EOW Configurations .............................. 24
Equipment Alarms.................................. 69
ESM-CORE Card Configuration ............ 30
ETH Configuration ............................... 133
ETH Traffic Flow .................................... 92
Ethernet Packet Performance.............. 335
Extension Link Protection Configuration
......................................................... 188
Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow. 187
Extension Shelf Configuration................ 29
F
Fan Unit Fault Clearance ..................... 481
Flow Chart Symbol Legend.................. 556
G
GFP Assignment .......................... 219; 235
GFP Frames Performance................... 369
GFP Group Subview ............................ 234
GFP Group Traffic Flow ....................... 233
H
How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast
Cross Connection ............................ 510
How to Add an SNCP Protection to an
Existing LO Path .............................. 528
652

How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards


......................................................... 485
How to Configure DCC Cross Connections
......................................................... 513
How to Configure ETH Cards and
Debugging........................................ 489
How to Configure ETH Concatenations534
How to Configure NSAP Settings......... 483
How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports 486
How to Configure RPR Bandwidths ..... 542
How to Configure RPR Protection........ 526
How to Configure SDH Concatenations
......................................................... 533
How to Configure the Squelch Table for 2F
or 4F Rings ...................................... 522
How to Configure the Subrack Equipping
......................................................... 484
How to Configure the Timing................ 491
How to Configure the Visible Alarm
Signaling .......................................... 495
How to Configure TIF Ports.................. 497
How to Copy Alarm Performance and
Traffic Configurations from Object to
Object............................................... 487
How to Copy Card Configurations from
Object to Object ............................... 488
How to Create / Delete a 1+1 MSP Line
Protection ......................................... 519
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING
Protection ......................................... 520
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING
Protection ......................................... 521
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

How to Create / Delete an 1+1 MSP Line


Protections ....................................... 519

How to Set or Clear Cross Connection


Filter Options.................................... 499

How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card


Protection......................................... 523

How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection


Filter Options.................................... 515

How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card


Protection......................................... 524

How to Set Sync Priorities.................... 493

How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 SF10G


or SF160G Card Protection ............. 525

How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP SubChannel............................................ 537

How to Create / Delete VC Channels .. 535

How to Set Up a Microshelf Extension Link


......................................................... 532

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG538

How to Set Up the Squelching Table ... 530

How to Create a Broadcast Cross


Connection....................................... 509

How to Specify the CUG Service Class540


How to Suppress Alarms...................... 496

How to Create a Cross Connection ..... 500


How to Upload VCDB Files .................. 544
How to Create a Cross Connection from a
Tributary Ethernet Port to an RPR.. 505
How to Create a Drop / Continue
Connection....................................... 508
How to Create an OH Cross Connection
......................................................... 516
How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12/VC3
Cross Connection ............................ 504
How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross
Connection....................................... 506
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross
Connection....................................... 501
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross
Connection....................................... 502
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross
Connection....................................... 503

I
IF2M / IF345M Card Configuration......... 49
IF2M Card Label Information ................. 39
IF2M Port Configuration ....................... 122
IFO155M Card Label Information........... 35
IFO155ME Card Label Information ........ 37
IFS40G-MX Card Configuration ............. 51
IFS40G-MX Card Label Information....... 40
IFSO* Cards Configuration .................... 54
IP Addresses Configuration ................. 285
IP Addresses Entry Modify................... 287
IP Static Routing Configuration ............ 288

How to Create an SNCP Protection..... 527

IP Static Routing Entry Add.................. 290

How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast


Connection....................................... 511

IP Static Routing Entry Modify ............. 291

How to Disconnect a Cross Connection


......................................................... 512
How to Disconnect an OH Cross
Connection....................................... 517
How to Download VCDB Files ............. 543
How to Read Out the RPR Performance
Monitoring Statistic .......................... 541
How to Replace an MMC and/or the
SCOH .............................................. 545

ISTM 4 Configuration ........................... 190


L
LCAS State Configuration .................... 243
LCAS VC12-nv Configuration .............. 246
LCAS VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection 248
LCAS VC3-nv Configuration ................ 245
LCAS VC3-nv Virtual VC3 Selection.... 247
LCAS Virtual VC12 Configuration ........ 251

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

653

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

LCAS Virtual VC3 Configuration .......... 249

Log Records Attribute .......................... 332

NE and Subrack Fault Clearance......... 469

NE Logs Information ............................ 331

MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information


......................................................... 261

NEAP Configuration ............................... 68


Neighbour Ports ..................................... 25

MCF CLNS Performance ..................... 263


Network Element Configuration ............. 14
MCF DCC Configuration ...................... 265
NewTopic 1 .......................................... 489
MCF DCC Linkage Configuration ........ 266
NewTopic 2 ............................................ 97
MCF DCC Linkage Performance ......... 268
NMS NE Password............................... 460
MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration .. 273
O
MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance ... 275
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance 470
MCF IP over OSI Configuration ........... 279
Option Settings....................................... 22
MCF OSI over IP Adding a Reachable
Address............................................ 283
MCF OSI over IP Modifying a Reachable
Address............................................ 284
MCF OSI over IP Configuration ........... 280
MCF OSI over IP Performance ............ 282
MCF Stack Parameters Configuration . 256
MCF Transport Connection Information
......................................................... 258
MCF Transport Connection Performance
......................................................... 259
Message Communication Functions.... 255
Mixed Mode GFP Assignment ............. 219
Modify Cross Connection..................... 150
Modify LCAS Concatenation Group..... 244
Modify Template................................... 208
Modifying a Reachable DCC Address . 270

OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration . 299


OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add....... 301
OSPF Area Metric Configuration.......... 298
OSPF Areas Configuration................... 295
OSPF Areas Entry Modify .................... 297
OSPF Configuration ............................. 293
OSPF External LSDB Entry Details ..... 318
OSPF External LSDB Information........ 317
OSPF Interface Metric Configuration ... 306
OSPF Interfaces Configuration ............ 302
OSPF Interfaces Entry Add.................. 304
OSPF LSDB Entry Details.................... 316
OSPF LSDB Information ...................... 315
OSPF Neighbours Information ............. 310
OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration . 307

Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address


......................................................... 278

OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add....... 309

Module View Double-row Subrack........ 16

OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details 314

Module View Single-row Subrack ......... 19

OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information.. 312

MSTTP Far End Performance ............. 345

Overhead Cross Connections .............. 151

MSTTP Near End Performance ........... 342

P
PDH Cards Label Information ................ 36

654

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

PF2G5 Add CUG ................................. 241

Software Management ......................... 463

PF2G5 GFP Assignment ..................... 237

STM-1 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow ................ 107

PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management


Configuration ................................... 239

STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow ............... 103


STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow ...... 101

PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management


Configuration ................................... 240
PF2G5 Single CUG Management
Configuration ................................... 238

STM-1 Traffic Flow ................................. 85


STM-16 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow .............. 109

Plain Cross Connections List ............... 143

STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic


Flow.................................................. 105

Port Configuration ................................ 121

STM-16 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow112

Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards.... 122

STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection................... 88

Port Provisioning Configuration ............. 55

STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection 2F-SPRING


......................................................... 177

Possible Equipping Information ............. 31


Protection Management....................... 153
R

STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection 2F-SPRING


Extra................................................. 178
STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection 4F-SPRING
......................................................... 179

Retrieve NSAP and VCDB................... 555


RPR Feeder Performance ................... 455
RPR Ring Performance ....................... 453
RPR Switch Configuration ................... 451

STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection Prepared 2FSPRING ........................................... 176


STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic
Flow.................................................. 111

RSTTP Near End Performance ........... 348

STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP


Traffic Flow ...................................... 113

STM-16 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow .... 113

SCOH NE and Subrack Fault Clearance


......................................................... 478

STM-16 Traffic Flow ............................... 89

SCOH and CLU Card Fault Clearance 478


SCOH Card Configuration ..................... 44
SCOH Card Label Information ............... 38
Script Configuration ............................... 26
SDH GFP Assignment ......................... 242
SDH or Ethernet Interfaces Card Label
Information......................................... 35
SF160G Card Configuration .................. 46
SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration.... 47
SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Singlerow Subrack....................................... 48
Software Download .............................. 465

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

STM-4 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow ................ 108


STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow ............... 104
STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection..................... 86
STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow ...... 102
STM-4 Traffic Flow ................................. 87
STM-64 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow .............. 110
STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic
Flow.................................................. 106
STM-64 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow115
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection................... 90
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection 2F-SPRING
......................................................... 181

655

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection 2F-SPRING


Extra ................................................ 182

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
VC12-2v Configuration ......................... 201
VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection .......... 193

STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection 4F-SPRING


......................................................... 183
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection Prepared 2FSPRING ........................................... 180
STM-64 Gauge Performance............... 339
STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic
Flow ................................................. 114
STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP
Traffic Flow ...................................... 116

VC3/VC12 Configuration CTP.............. 129


VC3/VC12 Configuration TTP .............. 131
VC3-2v Configuration ........................... 202
VC4 Configuration .................................. 94
VC4 Multiplex Structure ....................... 139
VC4 Selection......................................... 96

STM-64 Traffic Flow............................... 91

VC4 Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards


......................................................... 119

STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration ........... 155

VC4 Static Multiplex Traffic Flow ........... 97

STM-N Configuration ........................... 124

VCCTP Far End Performance.............. 354

Subrack Data ....................................... 323

VCCTP Near End Performance ........... 351

SURPASS hiT 7070 Features................ 10

VCTTP Far End Performance .............. 360

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance .... 476

VCTTP Near End Performance............ 357

Synchronous Equipment Clock


Configuration ..................................... 57

Virtual 16x VC4 Selection .................... 197

T
T0 Configuration..................................... 60
T1 Configuration..................................... 61
T3 / T4 Config ........................................ 62
TCA List ................................................. 83
TCP Connections Entry Details ........... 321
TCP Connections Information.............. 319
TIF Configuration ................................... 82
TIF Fault Clearance ............................. 480
U
Using this Help System ............................ 9
V
VC12 Far End Performance................. 366
VC12 Near End Performance .............. 363

656

Virtual 2x AU4/VC4 Selection .............. 225


Virtual 2x VC3 Selection ...................... 194
Virtual 4x VC4 Selection ...................... 195
Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection ............ 198
Virtual 7x VC4 Selection ...................... 196
Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration............. 230
Virtual VC12 Configuration................... 226
Virtual VC3/VC4 Configuration............. 228
VLAN C Mode GFP Assignment .......... 217
VLAN C Traffic Flow..................... 214; 217
VLAN Functionality............................... 211
VLAN Selection .................................... 216
W
Working STM-1 Selection .................... 164
Working VC4 Selection ........................ 165

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619